JP4999564B2 - Game system, management device and slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, a management device for managing these slot machines, and a management device And a gaming system including a slot machine.

  In recent years, in this type of slot machine, a bonus to a player (for example, a mobile phone standby screen, a ring tone, wallpaper used for a PC, BGM used for a game, etc.) is given at the end of the bonus. Or a lottery of whether or not, and the lottery result is coded and displayed, and the player has a function that allows the player to read the coded lottery result with a mobile phone etc. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-34629 A

In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, an address (URL) on the Internet corresponding to the lottery result indicating whether or not a privilege is granted is encoded so as to be identifiable, and the lottery result is supported on a server on the Internet. By storing prize data corresponding to each address area to be read, it is possible to read these coded addresses with a mobile phone or the like and obtain prize data corresponding to the lottery result. However, since the contents and number of benefits provided depend only on the lottery results determined for each slot machine model, the expandability of the benefits provided by the code information for acquiring these benefits is sufficient. There was a problem that could not be secured.

The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and provides a gaming system, a management device, and a slot machine that can enhance the extensibility of benefits provided by code information for obtaining benefits. The purpose is to do.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming system according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result is derived and displayed, and one game is finished, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device and a privilege are given. A gaming system having a management device,
The slot machine is
An image display device (liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image;
Date output means (clock device 97) for outputting date information,
A history storage unit (game history storage area allocated to RAM 91c) for storing a game history based on the game results,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant the privilege by lottery;
Information display determination that determines whether or not to display the information for obtaining the privilege (performs a privilege grant lottery at the end of the big bonus) on the condition that the privilege grant determining means determines to grant the privilege. Means,
Code information generating means for generating code information obtained by coding (two-dimensional coding) the information when the information display determining means determines that the information is to be displayed (when the bonus grant lottery is won);
Code information display means for displaying the code information (two-dimensional code) generated by the code information generation means on the image display device (liquid crystal display 51) in a form readable from the outside;
With
Said code information generating means, as the information, and the date and time information acquired from the date output means (timepiece device 97), the history storage unit game history information stored in the (game history storage area allocated to the RAM 91c) , Randomly generated random information for identifying whether or not the privilege has been obtained, and code information (two-dimensional code) encoded in a identifiable manner,
The management device
A specifying means for specifying the date and time information, the game history information, and the random number information from the code information;
Random number information storage means for storing the random number information specified from the code information to which the privilege has been granted;
Determining means for determining whether or not the random number information specified by the specifying means is stored in the random number information storage means;
The date and time information specified by the specifying means and the game history on the condition that the determining means determines that the random number information specified by the specifying means is not stored in the random number information storage means. A granting means for granting a privilege based on the information;
It is characterized in that it comprises.
Moreover, the management device according to claim 4 of the present invention is:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. One game is completed by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device, an image display device capable of displaying an image, a date and time output means for outputting date and time information, On condition that the history storage means for storing the game history based on the result of the game, the privilege grant determining means for determining whether to grant a privilege by lottery, and the privilege grant determining means are determined to grant the privilege. The information display determination means for determining whether or not to display information for obtaining the privilege, and the information display determination means, when the information display determination means determines to display the information, the information is encoded. Code information generating means for generating code information; and code information display means for displaying the code information generated by the code information generating means on the image display device in a form that can be read from the outside. As the information, the generation means acquires the date and time information acquired from the date and time output means, the game history information stored in the history storage means, and a randomly changing random number for identifying whether or not the privilege has been obtained. A management device that grants the privilege based on the code information displayed in the slot machine that generates code information that is coded in such a way that information can be specified,
A specifying means for specifying the date and time information, the game history information, and the random number information from the code information;
Random number information storage means for storing the random number information specified from the code information to which the privilege has been granted;
Determining means for determining whether or not the random number information specified by the specifying means is stored in the random number information storage means;
The date and time information specified by the specifying means and the game history on the condition that the determining means determines that the random number information specified by the specifying means is not stored in the random number information storage means. A granting means for granting a privilege based on the information;
With
It is characterized by that.
Furthermore, the slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and a variable display device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed when a display result is derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
An image display device (liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image;
Date output means (clock device 97) for outputting date information,
History storage means (game history storage area allocated to the RAM 91c) for storing a game history based on the result of the game;
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant the privilege by a management device that grants the privilege, by lottery;
Information display determination that determines whether or not to display the information for obtaining the privilege (performs a privilege grant lottery at the end of the big bonus) on the condition that the privilege grant determining means determines to grant the privilege. Means,
Code information generating means for generating code information obtained by coding (two-dimensional coding) the information when the information display determining means determines that the information is to be displayed (when the bonus grant lottery is won);
Code information display means for displaying the code information (two-dimensional code) generated by the code information generation means on the image display device (liquid crystal display 51) in a form readable from the outside;
With
The code information generation means includes, as the information, date and time information (clock device 97) acquired from the date and time output means, game history information (game history storage area assigned to the RAM 91c) stored in the history storage means, and , And randomly generated random information for identifying whether or not the privilege has been obtained, and code information (two-dimensional code) encoded in a identifiable manner.
It is characterized by that.
According to these features, when it is determined to display information for obtaining a privilege, the date and time information at that time, the game history at that time, and whether or not the privilege has been obtained are identified. Code information is generated that can be specified to identify random number information that randomly changes and is readable from the outside as information for obtaining benefits, so benefits based on information for obtaining benefits Can be set in various ways based on the combination of the date and time information specified from the code information and the game history, the provided privilege is uniquely determined by the lottery information etc. Therefore, the extensibility of the privilege provided based on the information for obtaining the privilege can be enhanced.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
The game results include, for example, bonus winning, winning, bonus ending, specific small winning, winning. In addition, the game history such as the number of games since the opening of the store, the number of bonuses, the bonus probability, the number of games between bonuses, the probability of winning a small role, the number of winning times of a small role, and the gaming history during a specific period (for example, during a bonus), etc. A predetermined condition may be satisfied.
The game history based on the game results includes, for example, the number of games since the opening of the store, the number of bonuses, the bonus probability, the number of games between bonuses, the small role probability, the number of small winnings, and the like. It may be a game history during a period (for example, during a bonus).
Information for obtaining benefits is data required when obtaining benefits other than profits directly granted by gaming machines via the network or postal mail, and determines the benefits granted by the service provider It is data that is necessary to do.
In addition, the privilege may be information, goods, rights, etc. that are beneficial to the player, for example, a mobile phone standby screen, ringtone, wallpaper used for PC, data content such as BGM used for games, etc. Real prizes, the right to be able to win prizes (lottery rights), the next time the game is played in a special production mode, or in a state that is more advantageous than normal (when the password described later is not entered) A password for playing a game, information indicating a set value, information for estimating a set value, and the like.
Code information obtained by encoding information for obtaining a privilege is a rule in which a URL on a network where the privilege can be obtained, a game history and a time required for obtaining the privilege, and the like are determined in advance. Converted character strings, URLs and character strings converted into one-dimensional codes or two-dimensional codes, passwords given to obtain benefits, passwords converted into one-dimensional codes or two-dimensional codes, etc. Is applicable. Moreover, what combined URL on the network which can obtain a privilege, a character string, and a password, what combined these combinations into the one-dimensional code or the two-dimensional code, etc. may be sufficient.
The code information display means that the code information is displayed on the image display device in a form that can be read from the outside means that the code information is displayed in a form that can be visually read by humans (such as display of a character string). It may be displayed in a readable form by using a special reading device such as a one-dimensional code or a two-dimensional code.

Gaming system of claim 2 of the present invention is a game system according to claim 1,
The code information generation means is code information (2) that is coded so as to be able to specify at least the date / time information and the game history information (a character string obtained by encrypting a privilege extraction parameter with a common key) among the information. (Dimensional code) is generated.
A slot machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 5,
The code information generation means is code information (2) that is coded so as to be able to specify at least the date / time information and the game history information (a character string obtained by encrypting a privilege extraction parameter with a common key) among the information. Dimension code)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is difficult to analyze information for obtaining a privilege, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being obtained illegally by copying and falsifying information for obtaining the privilege. .

Gaming system of claim 3 of the present invention is a game system according to claim 1 or 2,
The slot machine is
A demonstration effect executing means for executing a demonstration effect on the image display device (liquid crystal display 51) when a state in which no game is progressing after the game ends continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds);
In the case where the code information display means displays the code information, even if a state in which the game is not progressing after the game ends continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds), the period during which the code information is displayed is displayed during the demonstration. Demo information prohibition means at the time of code information display prohibiting execution,
It is characterized by having.
A slot machine according to claim 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 5 or 6,
A demonstration effect executing means for executing a demonstration effect on the image display device (liquid crystal display 51) when a state in which no game is progressing after the game ends continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds);
In the case where the code information display means displays the code information, even if a state in which the game is not progressing after the game ends continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds), the period during which the code information is displayed is displayed during the demonstration. Demo information prohibition means at the time of code information display prohibiting execution,
With
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the state where the code information is displayed on the image display device, even when a predetermined time has elapsed, execution of the demonstration effect by the image display device is prohibited during the period in which the code information is displayed. Therefore, the time for the player to read the code information can be secured, and the player can read the code information with certainty.
The period in which the code information is displayed may be a period from when the code information is displayed until a predetermined display time elapses, or the player is instructed to end the display of the code information. It may be a period until the operation is performed. Furthermore, it may be a period until a predetermined display time elapses after the code information is displayed, or until an operation for instructing the display end of the code information by the technician is performed before that.
In addition, when the code information display demonstration effect prohibiting means is configured to operate by program control, the code information display demonstration effect prohibiting unit is not limited to that realized by a program that performs control to actively prohibit the execution of the demonstration effect. This includes programs that are created so that routines for performing performances are not called.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 ,
The image display device (liquid crystal display) including: a continuous effect that lasts for a continuous effect period that exceeds one game; and a demonstration effect that is executed when a state in which no game is progressing after the game ends continues for a predetermined period 51) Image element data storage means (CGROM 205) that stores in advance a plurality of types of image element data (characters) respectively corresponding to a plurality of types of effects executed by displaying images on
A means for storing data so as to be readable and writable, and a temporary storage area (on the VRAM) in which image element data (character) corresponding to the effect being executed among the plurality of types of image element data (character) is temporarily written. Image data storage including a general character buffer L2) and a frame area (drawing area (display area) on the VRAM) in which image data is drawn based on the image element data (character) written in the temporary storage area Means (SDRAM 210);
Effect control means (CPU 91a, graphic controller 200) for controlling the execution of the effect by displaying the image on the image display device as the game progresses;
With
The production control means includes
In the game in which the execution of the continuous effect is started, the image element data (character) of the continuous effect is read from the image element data storage means (CGROM 205), and the read image element data of the continuous effect is stored in the temporary storage area (VRAM). Continuous production data writing means for writing to the above general-purpose character buffer L2);
After the game is over, the demonstration effect image element data (character) is read from the image element data storage means (CGROM 205), and the read demonstration effect image element data is stored in the temporary storage area (general character buffer on the VRAM). Demo production data writing means for writing to L2),
Image element data (character) written in the temporary storage area (general character buffer L2 on the VRAM) is read out, and image data is read from the frame area (drawing area (display on the VRAM) on the basis of the read image element data. Image data drawing means for drawing in the area));
An image corresponding to the image data drawn in the frame area (display area (drawing area on the VRAM)) is displayed on the image display device (liquid crystal display 51) every predetermined frame period (V blank). Display control means,
After the continuous effect data writing means writes the image element data (character) of the continuous effect in the temporary storage area (general character buffer L2 on the VRAM) until the execution of the continuous effect ends. Means for prohibiting demonstration production during continuous production for prohibiting execution of the demonstration production;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, the image element data of the continuous effect is written in the temporary storage area, and the demo effect is prohibited until the end of the continuous effect corresponding thereto, and as a result, until the continuous effect ends. Since the image element data of the demonstration effect is not written in the temporary storage area, the image element data of the continuous effect is not erased from the temporary storage area by writing the image element data of the demonstration effect. For this reason, in order to produce a demonstration effect unrelated to the progress of the game, generally, the image element data of a continuous effect with a large amount of data is read from the image element data storage means and written in the temporary storage area of the image data storage means. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of duplicate overhead.
The demonstration effect data writing means may write the image element data of the demonstration effect in the temporary storage area when a state in which the game is not progressing after the game is finished continues for a predetermined time. In this case, the image data of the demonstration effect is drawn in the frame area after the image element data of the demonstration effect is written. On the other hand, the demonstration effect data writing means may write the image element data of the demonstration effect in the temporary storage area immediately after the game ends. In this case, when a state where the game has not progressed after the game is finished continues for a predetermined time, the image data is drawn in the frame area based on the image element data of the demonstration effect written immediately after the game is finished. It becomes.
Further, the continuous performance may be capable of forcibly terminating the execution in the middle of the execution according to the player's instruction. In this case, the demonstration effect prohibiting means during the continuous effect can prohibit the execution of the demonstration effect until the execution of the continuous effect is forcibly terminated by an instruction from the player.
In addition, in the case where the demonstration effect prohibiting means at the time of continuous performance is configured to operate by program control, the demonstration effect is not limited to that realized by a program that performs control to positively prohibit execution of the demonstration effect. This includes a program that has been created so that a routine that implements execution of the program is not called.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 and means 1 ,
Game value storage means (credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a player's own game value (credit: number of medals owned by the player);
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means;
A game value return control (credit settlement process) for returning the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation means (settlement switch 10). Game value return control means to perform,
A sound output control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control to continuously output a continuous game sound effect (BGM) over one game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (special role winning, start of continuous production). Sound output control)
In a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game effect sound (BGM) at a normal volume, after the game is over, the bet number is not set by the bet number setting means for a predetermined time ( 30 seconds), sound volume reduction control means for performing control to lower the sound effect sound output from the slot machine (silence control by the sub-control unit 91),
With
The volume reduction control means is configured to control the game value return control (credit credit) by the game value return control means in a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect (BGM) at the normal volume. The control is also performed to reduce the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine even when the settlement process is executed.
According to this feature, when a predetermined time elapses without setting the number of bets after the previous game is finished in a state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, that is, the previous game In addition to the case where the state in which no operation related to the progress of the game is performed after the completion of the game continues for a predetermined time, the slot for the game value return control is performed according to the operation of the game value return operation means by the player. The sound effect sound output from the machine is reduced. In other words, in the state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, the sound effect output from the slot machine by the player's intention even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the previous game. Therefore, even if the game is interrupted, there is no inconvenience to surrounding players.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 and means 1 and 2 ,
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number in accordance with a player's bet number setting operation (inserting medals, betting operation of credits by one bet switch 5 and a MAX BET switch 6);
Bet number storage means (BET counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing the bet number set by the bet number setting means;
A bet number return control (betting number reimbursement process) for returning a gaming value corresponding to the bet number stored in the bet number storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined bet number returning operation means (settlement switch 10). Bet number return control means to be performed;
A sound output control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control to continuously output a continuous game sound effect (BGM) over one game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (special role winning, start of continuous production). Sound output control)
In a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game effect sound (BGM) at a normal volume, after the game is over, the bet number is not set by the bet number setting means for a predetermined time ( 30 seconds), sound volume reduction control means for performing control to lower the sound effect sound output from the slot machine (silence control by the sub-control unit 91),
With
In the state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect (BGM) at the normal sound volume, the volume reduction control means controls the bet number return control (the number of bets) by the bet number return control means. The control is also performed to reduce the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine even when the settlement process is executed.
According to this feature, when a predetermined time elapses without setting the number of bets after the previous game is finished in a state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, that is, the previous game From the slot machine, the bet number return control is performed not only in the case where the operation related to the progress of the game is not performed for a predetermined time after the end of the game, but also according to the operation of the bet number return operation means by the player. The volume of the output sound effect decreases. In other words, in the state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, the sound effect output from the slot machine by the player's intention even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the previous game. Therefore, even if the game is interrupted, there is no inconvenience to surrounding players.

In addition, in the means 3 and 4 , the timing is started based on the end of the game when the display result of the variable display device is derived or when a prize accompanied with a game value is generated. Includes starting timing from the timing resulting from the end of the game, such as when the provision of gaming value according to the winning is completed.
In addition, in the means 3 and 4 , “continuous game sound effects are continuously output beyond one game” means that, for example, after the sound is started during the game, the game continues continuously after the game ends. It is a sound effect and is limited to those that continue to sound until the next game is started after the end of one game, that is, those that continue to sound over multiple games. It includes things that continue to sound after the end of one game until at least the next game can be started (until a predetermined number of bets are set). It is.
In the means 3 and 4 , the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine may be control for lowering the volume level of the sound effect output from the slot machine from a normal level. The control may completely mute. Further, the control may be such that the currently output sound effect is stopped and a sound effect having a lower output volume is output.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 and means 1 to 3 ,
A game control board (game control board 40) equipped with game control means (main control unit 41) for performing control to advance the game;
A gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) including at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game;
The gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is detachable by connecting the connectors (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g). ) And the game control board (game control board 40) for electrically connecting the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40). Wiring (cables 600a, 601g);
The wiring and connectors (board side connector 621a, cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g, and cable side connector 612g) are connected to each other, and the gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board) 40) a relay board (operation part relay board 110) for relaying input / output of signals to / from,
The connection between the connectors on the wiring between the game electronic component (the inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40) is broken, and the release restriction part related to the connection between the connectors is destroyed. Electronic component connection release restriction means (connector restriction members 500a, 650) that form a connection release restriction state that makes the release impossible unless
With
The electronic component connection release regulating means is
Connector (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable) of the wiring (cable 600a) between the game control board (game control board 40) and the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) First electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting members 500, 650) that disable the connection between the side connectors 611a),
Connection between the wiring board (cable 601g) and the connector (board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g) between the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) and the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is performed. A second electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting member 660) that makes the release impossible;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, not only the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, but also the release of the connection between the wiring connectors between the relay board and the game electronic component is regulated, The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is restricted. As a result, it is difficult to perform any illegal act such as replacing any connector with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool and causing the game control board to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game. For example, a slot machine set in a state where it is easy to obtain information for obtaining a privilege to use a driving tool, or a slot machine set in a state where a special prize is won, such as an amusement store. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal business operations such as providing to players at times.
In addition, since the connection release restriction state is formed by the electronic component connection release restriction means, in order to release the connection between the connectors, the release restriction part must be destroyed, and after this, the connection is released again. Since it becomes extremely difficult to form a connection release restriction state and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively suppress the fraud.
One or more relay boards may be connected between one gaming electronic component and the game control board. When a plurality of relay boards are connected, the electronic component connection release restriction Preferably, the means includes third electronic component connection release restriction means that makes it impossible to release connection between the connectors of the wiring between one relay board and another relay board. The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is regulated.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and to a side end of the housing. And a front door that is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the outer periphery of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, “plum”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 3) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. In addition, the liquid crystal display includes a non-glare type liquid crystal display in which the surface of the liquid crystal panel is subjected to non-glare processing and a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing (gloss processing) is performed. In this case, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (in this embodiment, an initial gaming state, which will be described later, MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting RT (1) (replay time (1)) and RT (2) (replay time (2)), 3 in the regular bonus described later, stored as credit Settlement switch 1 that is operated when the medals used and the medals used for setting the number of bets are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and bets are returned) , Start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and game history data relating to the results of the games that have already been performed A selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57 that are operated when browsing, initializing, and selecting a production mode are provided so as to be operable by the player.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 3) is provided.

  Inside the front door is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value or confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying a set value at that time, a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a later-described hopper tank (not shown) side or a medal payout opening 9 provided inside the housing. A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to one of the two sides is provided, and an insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and has flowed to the hopper tank side is provided.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) become valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the initial gaming state described later, RT (1) and RT (2), and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. It has been. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3 set across the symbols lined up to the right, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, Four types of winning lines L4 set across the lower row of the reel 2R, that is, straddling the symbols arranged in the lower right are defined as winning lines.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described L1 to L4 are applied as the pay lines. However, even if a pay line that is set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is added. good.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L4. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, the number of medals to be awarded per game is limited to an upper limit (in this embodiment, an initial gaming state described later, 10 in RT (1) and RT (2), 15 in a regular bonus described later). ) And the total number of payouts exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals will be awarded. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L4, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  In particular, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, voltages are supplied to at least a sub-control unit 91 (CPU 91a) described later and a display control circuit 92 described later, among the power supply lines that supply the voltage generated by the power supply substrate 100 to each unit. Power supply line for supplying voltage to a later-described liquid crystal drive circuit 1215 mounted on the liquid crystal display 51, a power supply line for supplying voltage to an LED drive circuit 93 to be described later, and a voltage to a reel LED 55 to be described later. A power supply line to be supplied is wired electrically independently.

  Note that electrically independent wiring means that these wiring lines are provided in an electrically non-contact state even when they are wired on the same cable or the same substrate.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. Reset circuit 49 for giving, disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the insertion medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and others Various devices and circuits are installed.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set between an interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the number of times) and a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a).

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Interrupt processing (main) is executed. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even in the event of a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 41c is retained. It has become.

  At the time of activation, the CPU 41a acquires the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29, and sets valid / invalid of the stop function and valid / invalid of the automatic checkout function in a specific register of the CPU 41a. Yes. The state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 is acquired only at the time of activation, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 29 is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and these connection states. If one of these is released, a disconnection flag indicating that these connection states have been released is stored in a storage unit such as an EEPROM (not shown) provided in the disconnection monitoring IC 50. . In response to the disconnection flag confirmation request from the CPU 41a, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 returns whether or not the disconnection flag is stored. At this time, the disconnection flag is cleared if it is stored in the storage unit.

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure. For example, unless the power failure state continues for 2 to 3 days, an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is performed. Monitoring of the connection state and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be continued.

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected with the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 described above, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door of the slot machine 1, These electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the connected liquid crystal display 51, an LED LED circuit 93 that controls driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that provides a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the initialization command from the CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, or a switch detection circuit 96 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90; Date and time information including date information and time information (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) A clock device 97 for outputting, a power interruption detection circuit 98 for monitoring a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputting a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub-control unit 91 when a voltage drop is detected; Other circuits and the like are mounted, and the CPU 91a performs various controls for performing an effect upon receiving a command transmitted from the game control board 40 and detection of switches connected to the effect control board 90. At the same time, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Further, an interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 91a is connected to a graphic controller 1200 (to be described later) of the display control circuit 92, and the CPU 91a periodically (every 33.3 ms in this embodiment) from the graphic controller 1200. An interrupt is generated based on the input of the output V blank interrupt signal, and the V blank interrupt processing is executed.

  The CPU 91a interrupts based on inputs of a transfer end interrupt signal, a read end interrupt signal, and a drawing end interrupt signal that are output from the graphic controller 1200 at the end of a transfer process, a read process, a drawing process, and the like, which will be described later. And the transfer end interrupt process, the read end interrupt process, and the drawing end interrupt process are executed. The transfer end interrupt signal is connected to the normal signal input terminal in addition to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 91a, and the CPU 91a can detect the transfer end interrupt signal via the input port in addition to the interrupt terminal. It is like that.

  The interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 91a is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98 described above, and the CPU 91a generates an interrupt in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Then, a power interruption interrupt process (sub) described later is executed. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Unlike the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a executes interrupt processing based on interrupts other than the interruption interrupt processing (sub) when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT). Even if it is in the middle, interrupt the corresponding process and execute the command reception interrupt process, and execute the command reception interrupt process with the highest priority even if other interrupts other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time It is supposed to be. Note that interrupts other than interrupts based on the input of the strobe signal (INT) are prohibited during execution of interrupt processes other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub). On the other hand, in the interruption interrupt processing (sub), other interruption processing including command reception interruption processing is completely prohibited, and even if other interruptions occur at the same time, interruption interruption processing (Sub) is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 91c. ing.

  Further, backup power is supplied to the clock device 97 in the event of a power failure, and the date / time information is not reset unless the power failure state continues for 2 to 3 days, for example.

  Next, details of wiring connection states between the game control board 40 and various game electronic components connected to the game control board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic view showing a wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and the game electronic components connected to the game control board 40.

  On the game control board 40, as described above, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and effect control board 90 are connected.

  FIG. 4 shows a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the number of bets among electronic components such as various switches and sensors connected to the game control board 40, and when starting a game. A start switch 7 that is operated, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set a bet number; Reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a payout sensor 35 for detecting medals to be paid out when a winning occurs, and an effect control board 90 are shown, and other switches, Illustrations of sensors and the like are omitted.

  The gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32 L, 32 C, 32 R, 33 L, 33 C, 33 R, 34, and 35 excluding the effect control board 90 send signals related to the progress of the game to the game control board 40. It is an electronic component that inputs and outputs. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reel, detection of the payout medals, etc. And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 output signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. 1 electronic component and a second electronic component to which a signal from the game control board 40 is input as the game progresses.

  Specifically, the single bet switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are operated when setting the bet number and the inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set the bet number are the operation or the medal of the medal. This is a first electronic component that outputs a BET signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection. Since the main control unit 41 performs the betting number setting process based on the reception of the BET signal, the betting number cannot be set without these electronic components. That is, since the game cannot be started unless the bet number is set, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are electronic components for games necessary for the progress of the game.

  The start switch 7 that detects an operation for starting a game is a first electronic component that outputs a start signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. Since the main control unit 41 performs a process for starting the game (reel rotation process or the like) based on the reception of the start signal, the game cannot be started without this electronic component. That is, the start switch 7 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that detect an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a stop signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. is there. The main control unit 41 performs a process of deriving the display result by stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the reception of the stop signal. The display result of cannot be derived. That is, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a detection signal for the reference position of the reel to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 does not have this electronic component because it performs processing to stop rotation by grasping the positions of the symbols of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on reception of the detection signal of the reference position of the reel. In addition, derivation of display results of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, determination of winning, etc. cannot be performed. That is, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The payout sensor 35 that detects a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs is a first electronic component that outputs a medal payout signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the medal. The main control unit 41 performs payout processing for paying out the number of medals according to the generated winning based on the reception of the payout medal detection signal. Cannot be paid out. That is, the payout sensor 35 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are second electronic components to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 is input. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and start the symbol variation display. Even if the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not actually rotated based on the above, the main control unit 41 receives the signals from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R after outputting the reel drive signals. The game can be controlled to proceed as the reel rotates. However, the timing at which signals are input to the game control board 40 from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is an error unless the reel drive signal is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of the rotation of the reel, a reel drive signal is required. That is, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The hopper motor 34 that drives the hopper tank that pays out medals is a second electronic component that receives a drive signal output from the game control board 40 in response to the occurrence of a prize. The hopper motor 34 drives the hopper tank based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and pays out medals, but does not actually drive the hopper tank based on the signal input. Even if the main control unit 41 outputs the hopper tank drive signal, the signal from the payout sensor 35 is input, so that the game can be controlled so that the medal is paid out. it can. However, the timing at which a signal is input from the payout sensor 35 to the game control board 40 is an error unless the hopper tank drive signal is output. Therefore, when the game is advanced by the driving tool described above, In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection, a driving signal for the hopper tank is required. That is, the hopper motor 34 is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 are basically electronic devices that are continuously used in common for a plurality of models. Since it is a component and there are few opportunities to remove it from the main body and replace it unless a failure or the like occurs, it is fixed at a predetermined position of the main body of the slot machine. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection with the game electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35. The gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35 and the game control board 40 are connected via a relay board, and these The boards and the board and the game electronic component are connected via a cable. The cable and the board are electrically connected by connecting a cable-side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board-side connector that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board.

  More specifically, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected to the game control board 40 via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via the power supply board 100. Thus, the game control board 40 is connected to the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 100, and the effect control board 90 include the game control board 40 and the electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, Wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting 33R, 34, and 35 are provided, and each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, A detection signal output from 35 to the game control board 40 or power or a signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In addition, the game control board 40 is connected by wiring the various electronic components and the game control board 40 via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 as described above. From the above, it becomes easy to organize wiring with a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always provided on the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the connector connecting portion from being searched for during the wiring connecting operation or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  The game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected via a cable 600a, and the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120 are connected via a cable 600b, and the game control board 40 and the power supply board 100 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 600c, and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80 are connected via a cable 600d.

  The operation unit relay board 110 and the single BET switch 5 are connected through a cable 601a, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the MAXBET switch 6 are connected through a cable 601b, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the start switch 7 Are connected via a cable 601c, the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8L are connected via a cable 601d, and the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8C are connected via a cable 601e. The board 110 and the stop switch 8R are connected via a cable 601f, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected via a cable 601g.

  The reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32L are connected via a cable 601h, the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32C are connected via a cable 601j, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32R are connected to a cable 601l. Connected through. The reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected via a cable 601i, the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33C are connected via a cable 601k, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected to a cable 601m. Connected through. The power supply board 100 and the hopper motor 34 are connected via a cable 601n, the power supply board 100 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via a cable 601o, and the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 are connected with a cable 601p. Connected through.

  Each of these cables 600a to 600c and 601a to 601o is connected to each board by a connector so that the wiring connection with the board can be released. Specifically, cable-side connectors 610a and 611a are provided at both ends of the cable 600a. One cable-side connector 610a is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620a fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 611a is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 621a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110. Cable side connectors 610b and 611b are provided at both ends of the cable 600b. One cable side connector 610b is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 620b fixed to the game control board 40, and the other side. The cable-side connector 611b is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621b fixed to the reel relay board 120. Cable-side connectors 610c and 611c are provided at both ends of the cable 600c. One cable-side connector 610c is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620c fixed to the game control board 40. The cable-side connector 611c is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621c fixed to the power supply board 100. Cable-side connectors 610d and 611d are provided at both ends of the cable 600d. One cable-side connector 610d is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620d fixed to the game control board 40, and the other The cable-side connector 611d is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621d fixed to the effect relay board 80.

  Further, a cable-side connector 612 a that can be connected to a board-side connector 622 a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601 a that has one end connected to the BET switch 5. At the other end of the cable 601b whose one end is connected to the MAXBET switch 6, a cable-side connector 612b that can be connected to the board-side connector 622b fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601c whose one end is connected to the start switch 7, a cable-side connector 612c that can be connected to the board-side connector 622c fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601d, one end of which is connected to the stop switch 8L, a cable side connector 612d that can be connected to the board side connector 622d fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601e whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8C, a cable-side connector 612e that can be connected to the board-side connector 622e fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601f whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8R, a cable-side connector 612f that can be connected to the board-side connector 622f fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. A cable-side connector 612g that can be connected to a board-side connector 622g fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601g that has one end connected to the inserted medal sensor 31.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601h whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32L and the other end of the cable 601i whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33L can be connected to the board-side connector 622h fixed to the reel relay board 120. A cable-side connector 612h is provided. One end of the cable 601j connected to the reel motor 32C and the other end of the cable 601k connected to the reel sensor 33C are connected to the board-side connector 622i fixed to the reel relay board 120. A side connector 612i is provided. A cable that can be connected to the board-side connector 622j fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601l having one end connected to the reel motor 32R and the other end of the cable 601m having one end connected to the reel sensor 33R. A side connector 612j is provided.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601n whose one end is connected to the hopper motor 34 and the other end of the cable 601o whose one end is connected to the payout sensor 35 can be connected to a board-side connector 622k fixed to the power supply board 100. A cable-side connector 612k is provided.

  In addition, cable-side connectors 612p and 613p are provided at both ends of the cable 601p. One cable-side connector 612p is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 622p fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 613p is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 623p fixed to the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, wiring is extended from each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35 without a connector. However, it may be connected to the wiring via a connector.

  As described above, each board and each cable includes board-side connectors 620a to 620d, 621a to 621d, 622a to 622k, 622p, and 623p provided on the board side, and cable-side connectors 610a to 610d provided on the cable side. Wiring is connected through a pair of connectors (male connector and female connector) consisting of 611a to 611d, 612a to 612k, 612p, and 613p, and the wiring connection is released by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector. Can be done. In particular, the game control board 40, the operation part relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power board 100, and the effect control board 90 are attached to predetermined locations on the casing or front door of the slot machine 1, so that the board side Since the cable side connector can be easily removed from the connector, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be easily replaced.

  First, the first electronic component will be described in detail. One of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, or the connector of a cable provided between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is driven into a connector. When the BET signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40, the bet number is set without performing the main control unit 41 even though the bet number setting operation is not performed. There is a risk of being. When a connector of a driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of a cable provided between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40, and a start signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40 There is a possibility that the game is started without performing the game start operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, and the stop signal is illegally transmitted from the driving tool to the game control board 40. If output, the rotation of the reel may be stopped without performing a stop operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R and the game control board 40, and the reel rotation signal is illegal from the driving tool to the game control board 40. Is output to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the result of the display may be derived, and the winning determination may be performed. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the payout sensor 35 and the game control board 40, and a medal payout signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40. There is a possibility that the medals are counted without paying out medals.

  The second electronic component will be described in detail. The game control board 40 is released by disconnecting one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the game control board 40. When the driving signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by the driving tool, the timing at which the driving signal of the reel is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving tool side, so game control is originally performed from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R. There is a possibility that the reel rotation detection signal input to the substrate 40 may be output from the driving tool at an appropriate timing after the reel rotation. In addition, the drive signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by a driving tool or the like after the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the hopper motor 34 and the game control board 40 is released. Then, the timing at which the driving signal of the hopper tank is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving instrument side. May be output at an appropriate timing after driving.

  As described above, the signals that are output from the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 according to the progress of the game and that are originally input to the game control board 40 are provided. When output from the driving tool, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game based on the reception of the signal, and is output from the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When a signal input to the second electronic component 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 is input to the driving tool, on the driving tool side, an output timing of a signal output from the main control unit 41 after driving the reel motor or the hopper motor When a new signal is input to the main control board 40 based on this, the main control unit 41 plays the game based on the reception of the signal. It is possible to perform control of the line, there is a possibility that fraud such causes game automatically proceed is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures are taken to prevent illegal acts caused by the connection of the driving tool. These measures will be described in detail later.

  Next, a configuration around the disconnection monitoring IC 50 in the game control board 40 will be described.

  The game control board 40 is supplied with + 5V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit of the power supply board 100. The + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 100 is supplied to the power supply terminal (VDD) as a drive power supply for the disconnection monitoring IC 50, and also branches on the game control board 40 as shown in FIG. 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 via the cable 600a, the operation unit relay board 110, the operation unit relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 via the cable 601g, and then folded back by the insertion medal sensor 31, Returning to the game control board 40 via the cable 601g, the operation unit relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and further connecting the game control board 40 and the production relay board 80 to the cable 600d, the production relay board 80, and the production relay board 80 Via the cable 601p for wiring and connecting the effect control board 90, the effect control board 90 is further turned back. Te, cable 601P, directing the relay board 80, so that via the cable 600d to return to the game controller board 40 again, is input as a connection signal to the input terminal disconnection monitoring IC50 (IN).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable-side connector 610a of the cable 600a are connected, and the cable-side connector 611a of the cable 600a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are connected. The connection of the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g, the connection of the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, and the cable side connector of the cable 600d 611d and the board-side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, the board-side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable-side connector 612p of the cable 601p, the cable-side connector 613p of the cable 601p and the production control board The connection signal input to the input terminal (IN) of the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is cut off by releasing any one of the connection to the board-side connector 623p of 0, and thus the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is connected to the game control board. 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the disconnection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are detected. That is, if the connection between the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are released even at one place, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 detects the disconnection. It has come to be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 100 branches on the game control board 40 and is connected to the ground level on the power supply board 100 side. A capacitor C1 is provided. D1 is a diode for preventing backflow. As a result, a DC voltage of +5 V can be stored in the capacitor C1, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor C1 can be supplied as a backup power source for driving the disconnection monitoring IC 50. Thus, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can detect disconnection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 regardless of whether it is during energization or during a power failure. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CPU 41a makes a disconnection flag confirmation request to the disconnection monitoring IC 50 at the time of activation, acquires the storage state of the disconnection flag based on a reply from the disconnection monitoring IC 50, and the disconnection flag Is stored, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and a disconnection error error code is set in the register to control the disconnection error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the normal error state, the disconnection abnormality error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the area of the RAM 41c that is being used by the CPU 41a is not changed. All the areas other than the initialization area are initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, and are not canceled until a new setting value is set in the setting change mode described above.

  Further, the CPU 41a also acquires the storage state of the disconnection flag of the disconnection monitoring IC 50 in the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed. If the disconnection flag is stored, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal as in the start-up. Then, the disconnection error error code is set in the register to control the disconnection error, and even in this case, the original state cannot be restored, and it is canceled until a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be done.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  Further, when the CPU 41a returns the processing state to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c at the time of activation, whether or not the winning flag of any special role is set, that is, the power interruption It is determined whether or not any special role has been won before, and if the winning flag for any special role is set, a power-on command is sent to indicate the special role and the sub-control is sent. Instruct the part 91 to notify that the special role is won. On the other hand, if the winning flag for any special combination is not set, a power-on command indicating that the special combination is not won is transmitted. When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command from the main control unit 41 at the time of activation, if it is a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the notice effect indicating that the special role is won by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like , And then continues until the special combination wins, but if it is a power-on command indicating that the special combination is not won, it will return to the backed-up performance state.

  Even if the backup is normal until the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized as will be described later. Without returning to the effect state, even if another command is received, the effect is not controlled accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the CPU 91 a Is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the sub control unit 91 receives the power-on command. It is impossible to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating the special role winning.

  That is, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is transmitted. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating the winning, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating the winning of the special role, and avoids receiving the power-on command on the side of the sub-control unit 91 to notify the winning of the special role. Since it is impossible to avoid the execution of the production, when the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption and the special role is elected before the power interruption as described above, The winning of special role will be notified.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, an initial gaming state, RT (1), and RT (2) as the gaming state. 3 is defined as the specified number of bets corresponding to the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the bet number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), When 3 is set as the bet number, the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L4 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L4 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L4 are activated.

  Also, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the winning line is activated (in the case of this embodiment, all winning lines are always activated. Will be called a winning line), and a combination of symbols called “comb” will be awarded. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (0 to 19) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus are watermelon, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 ( 3) The replay (1), the replay (2), the replay (3), and the replay (4) are defined as the replaying role of the bell. In addition, combinations of combinations in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), big bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) +1 (3), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Replay (1) + Replay (3), Replay (1) + Replay (4) are defined. However, since replays (2) to (4) are not subject to lottery alone, and combinations with replay (1) are always subject to lottery, the total number of combinations and combinations of combinations is 20. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the gaming state is an initial gaming state (the initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RT (1) and RT (2) during a bonus described later, and any bonus The game state after completion of RT, after changing settings, after completion of RT (1), or after completion of RT (2)), whether it is RT (1) or RT (2), or is it a regular bonus? , And the combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), whether or not any special role is being carried over (the fact that any special role has been elected in the special feature winning flag) Depending on whether or not is already set, the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to the lottery vary. Also, depending on whether the game is in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), the winning combination and combination of winning combinations are the same, but the winning probabilities are different. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when no special combination is carried over at RT (1), If “1” is set as the state number and no special combination is carried over in RT (2), “2” is set as the state number, and any special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state. If the special number is carried over at RT (1), "4" is set as the state number, and at RT (2) When any special combination is carried over, “5” is set as the state number, and when it is a regular bonus, “6” is set as the state number.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and no special role is carried over, that is, state numbers “0”, “1”, “ 2 ”is set, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) +1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Replay (1) + Replay (3), Replay (1) + Replay (4), Watermelon, Cherry, 1 (1 , One (2), one (3), the bell, that is, the combination of all roles and role as a target of the internal lottery. Also, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and any special role is carried over, that is, any of state numbers “3”, “4”, and [5] Is set, replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay (3), replay (1) + replay (4), watermelon, cherry, 1 The sheet (1), the sheet (2), the sheet (3), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 11 are the targets of the internal lottery. In addition, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “6” is set as the state number, watermelon, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), bell, ie, role Combinations and combinations of combinations after number 14 are subject to internal lottery.

  A watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and five in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Medals are paid out, and 15 medals are paid out in the regular bonus. Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Medals are paid out, and 15 medals are paid out in the regular bonus. When the “cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two winning lines L1 and L3 or the winning lines L2 and L4. Since winning a cherry on the winning line, four medals will be paid out in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), but in the regular bonus, two medals are on the winning line. Even if the cherry is won, the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out in one game is set to 15, so that only 15 medals are paid out. One (1) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Bell-any (any can be any symbol)” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. In RT (1) and RT (2), one medal is paid out, and in the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (2) wins when the combination of “white 7-bell-any” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2) In, one medal is paid out, and in the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (3) wins when the combination of “black BAR-bell-any” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2) In, one medal is paid out, and in the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 10 in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Medals are paid out, and 15 medals are paid out in the regular bonus.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Replay (3) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-replay-replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Replay (4) is awarded when the combination of “black BAR-replay-replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). When replays (1) to (4) win, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again. Since there is no replay winning, this is essentially the same as the case where three medals corresponding to 3) are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when the combination of “black BAR-black BAR-red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2) to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” in any of the winning lines in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Wins when you have the right. In addition, among these combinations, when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is prepared, the big bonus to be awarded is the big bonus (1), and the combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” The big bonus (2) that is won when winning is the big bonus. When the big bonus (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1). When the transition to the big bonus (1) is made, the transition to the regular bonus is made at the same time as the transition to the big bonus (1). Then, it is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonus (1) ends. That is, during the big bonus (1), the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus (1) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (1) exceeds 465. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1), the big bonus (1) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (2). If you move to Big Bonus (2), you will be transferred to Regular Bonus at the same time as Big Bonus (2). Then, it is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonus (2) ends. That is, during the big bonus (2), the regular bonus is always controlled as in the big bonus (1). The big bonus (2) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (2) exceeds 300. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus (2), the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “white 7-white 7-red 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be simply referred to as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  The gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and no special role is carried over, that is, the state number is set to “0”, “1”, or [2] If it is, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination of the combination of combination number 0-20, that is, big bonus (1) [port number 0], big bonus (2) [port number 1], regular Bonus [role number 2], big bonus (1) + cherry [role number 3], big bonus (2) + cherry [role number 4], big bonus (1) + 1 (1) [role number 5], big Bonus (2) +1 (1) [number 6], big bonus (1) +1 (2) [number 7], big bonus (2) +1 (2) [number 8], big bonus ( 1) +1 sheet (3) [position number 9], bi Bonus (2) +1 (3) [Role No. 10], Replay (1) [Role No. 11], Replay (1) + Replay (2) [Role No. 12], Replay (1) + Replay (3) [ Role number 13], Replay (1) + Replay (4) [Hand number 14], Watermelon [Hand number 15], Cherry [Hand number 16], 1 sheet (1) [Hand number 17], 1 sheet (2) [Position number 18], 1 piece (3) [Position number 19], and Bell [Position number 20] are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  The gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and any special role is carried over, that is, any of state numbers “3”, “4”, and [5] If it is set, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of combinations of the combination numbers 11 to 20, that is, replay (1) [portion number 11], replay (1) + replay (2) [portion number] 12], replay (1) + replay (3) [role number 13], replay (1) + replay (4) [role number 14], watermelon [role number 15], cherry [role number 16], 1 sheet ( 1) [Hand number 17], 1 sheet (2) [Hand number 18], 1 sheet (3) [Hand number 19], and Bell [Hand number 20] are sequentially read out as target parts for internal lottery.

  When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “6” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of combinations of the combination numbers 15 to 20, that is, watermelon [portion number 15], cherry [Role 16], 1 (1) [Role 17], 1 (2) [Role 18], 1 (3) [Role 19], and Bell [Role 20] are subject to internal lottery. It is sequentially read as a role.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  If a winning combination of any combination or combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of winning combination or combination determined is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which a winning flag for a role is set. Specifically, if any of the roles 0-2 is elected (special role), the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 3 to 10 (special role + general role) is elected, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work. A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 11 to 20 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values for each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role table, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is also registered. However, only the watermelons, cherries, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), and bell that are the payouts of medals when winning a prize are included.

  Also, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for payout of medals. In replay, there is no payout of medals, but since it is not necessary to insert medals used for setting the number of bets in the next game (always the initial game state, RT (1) or RT (2)), it is substantially 3 Same as paying out a sheet.

  The storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on the addresses registered in the role-specific table is provided in the address area assigned to the ROM 41 b of the main control unit 41.

  FIGS. 7 to 9 and FIGS. 10A to 10D are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. In FIG. 7, when no special role is carried over in the initial gaming state, in FIG. 8, when no special role is carried over in RT (1), in FIG. 9, any special role is carried out in RT (2). In FIG. 10A, when any special role is carried over in the initial game state when the special role is not carried over, any special role is shown at RT (1) in FIG. 10B. FIG. 10 (c) shows an example when any special combination is carried over in RT (2), and FIG. 10 (d) shows an example when the player is in a regular bonus. FIGS. 7 to 9 and FIGS. 10A to 10D show examples in which the set value is 6. FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 7, when no special role is carried over in the initial gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + cherry, the big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) , Big bonus (1) + 1 (3), big bonus (2) + 1 (3), replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay (3), replay ( 1) + Replay (4), Watermelon, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) are subject to internal lottery. Also, in this embodiment, with the setting value 6, the number of determination values for each combination when no special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state is 10, 15, 30, 6, 6, 3, 3, 3 5, 5, 5, 1636, 300, 200, 100, 64, 312, 100, 200, 300, and 1662 are registered, and the big bonus (1) that is the target of the internal lottery first is the judgment value. When the number 10 is added, the addition result overflows and 16374 to 16383 are won when random numbers for internal lottery are acquired.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 25, which is the sum of the determination value number 10 of the big bonus (1) and the determination value number 15 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16359 to 16373, which will overflow, are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16329-16358 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16323-16328 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16317-16322 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) is acquired when 16314-16316 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery , Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), 163111-16313 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), 16308-16310 are random numbers for internal lottery As a big bonus (2) + 1 (2), 16303-16307 are random numbers for internal lottery When the big bonus (1) +1 (3) is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, the big bonus (2) +1 (3) is 16293 When 16297 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, Replay (1) is obtained when 14657-16292 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and Replay (1) + Replay (2) is 14357 to 14656. Is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, replay (1) + replay (3) is replay (1) + replay (4) is obtained when 14157 to 14356 are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. , 14057-14156 were acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, watermelon was acquired as 13993-14056 as random numbers for internal lottery In addition, the cherry is 1 (1) when 13681 to 13992 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and 1 (2) when 13581 to 13680 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When 13381-1580 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1 sheet (3) is acquired when 13081-13380 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When it is acquired as a random number for use, it is determined that each wins. When 0 to 11361 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Replay (1) + Replay (3), Replay (1) + Replay (4), Watermelon, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), Bell for 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 546.1 1/273 .7, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 10.01 1 / 54.61, 1 / 81.92, 1 / 163.84, 1/256, 1 / 52.5, 1 / 163.84, 1 / 81.92, 15.44.61, 1/9 .86.

  As shown in FIG. 8, when no special combination is carried over in RT (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) +1 (3), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Replay (1) + Replay (3), Replay (1 ) + Replay (4), Watermelon, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), Bell is subject to internal lottery. In this embodiment, RT (1 ) As the number of judgment values of each combination when no combination is carried over, 10, 15, 30, 6, 6, 3, 3, 3, 5, 5, 5, 2136, 50, 50, 50, 64, 312, 100, 200, 300, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 11638.4, 1 / 102.3, 1 / 546.1, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 7.67, 1/327. 68, 1 / 327.68, 1 / 327.68, 1/256, 1 / 52.5, 1 / 163.84, 1 / 81.92, 1 / 54.61, and 1 / 14.87.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when no special combination is carried over in RT (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) +1 (3), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Replay (1) + Replay (3), Replay (1 ) + Replay (4), Watermelon, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), Bell is subject to internal lottery. In this embodiment, RT (2 ) As the number of judgment values of each combination when no combination is carried over, 10, 15, 30, 6, 6, 3, 3, 3, 5, 5, 5, 14140, 1, 1, 1, 64, 312, 100, 200, 300, and 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 546.1, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 1.16, 1/16384, 1/16384, 1/16384, 1/256, 1 / 52.5, 1 / 163.84, 1 / 81.92, 1 / 54.61, and 1 / 14.87.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when any special role is carried over in the initial game state, replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay ( 3), replay (1) + replay (4), watermelon, cherry, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet (3), only the bell is subject to internal lottery. At a value of 6, 1636, 300, 200, 100, 64, 324, 108, 208, 308, 1102 are registered as the number of judgment values for each combination when any special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state. The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 10.01, 1 / 54.61, 1 / 81.92, 1 / 163.84, 1/256, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 151.7, 1 / 78.77 1 / 53.19,1 / 14.87.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when any special role is carried over in RT (1), replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay (3), replay (1) + replay (4), watermelon, cherry, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet (3), only the bell is subject to internal lottery. In the setting value 6, 2136, 50, 50, 50, 64, 324, 108, 208, 308, 1102 are determined as the number of determination values of each combination when any special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state. The approximate winning probability of each role is 1 / 7.67, 1 / 327.68, 1 / 327.68, 1 / 327.68, 1/256, 1 / 50.6, 1 /151.7, 1 / 78.77, 1 / The 3.19,1 / 14.87.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, when any special role is carried over in RT (2), replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + replay (3), replay (1) + replay (4), watermelon, cherry, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet (3), only the bell is subject to internal lottery. In the setting value 6, 14140, 1, 1, 1, 64, 324, 108, 208, 308, and 1102 are determined as the number of determination values of each combination when any special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state. The approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.16, 1/16384, 1/16384, 1, 1/16384, 1/256, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 1151.7. 1 / 78.77, 1/53. The 9,1 / 14.87.

  As shown in FIG. 10D, in the regular bonus, only watermelon, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), and bell are subject to internal lottery. 64, 324, 108, 208, 308, and 15208 are registered as the number of determination values for each combination, and the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1/256, 1 / 50.6, and 1 / 1151.7. 1 / 78.77, 1 / 53.19, and 1 / 1.08.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  For the table index, the start address of the area where the data for table creation is stored from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) The difference up to the address where the index data indicating is stored is registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, lose, watermelon, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), bell, replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2), replay (1) + Replay (3), Replay (1) + Replay (4), Big Bonus (1) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 ( 1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1) + Replay (3), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1) + Replay (4), Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss) ), Big bonus 2) + watermelon, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (2) + 1 (1), big bonus (2) + 1 (2), big bonus (2) + 1 (3), big bonus (2 ) + Bell, big bonus (2) + replay (1), big bonus (2) + replay (1) + replay (2), big bonus (2) + replay (1) + replay (3), big bonus ( 2) + Replay (1) + Replay (4), Regular Bonus (+ Loss), Regular Bonus + Watermelon, Regular Bonus + Cherry, Regular Bonus +1 (1), Regular Bonus +1 (2), Regular Bonus +1 (3) Regular Bonus + Bell, Regular Bonus + Replay (1), Regular Bonus + Replay (1) + Lip Index indicating the start address of the area in which the table creation data is stored for each of (2), regular bonus + replay (1) + replay (3), regular bonus + replay (1) + replay (4) Data is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied (for example, when winning big bonus (1) + replay (1), when winning big bonus (2) + replay (1), Regular bonus + replay (1) When winning the same control, etc., the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is stored. The stop control table is created with reference.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table of each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is obtained by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the table index, the address corresponding to the case where one of the winning combinations is won is determined by the number of sliding frames to which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is not arranged. The index data for identifying the created table creation data is stored, and the table creation data in which the number of sliding frames to be drawn so that none of the roles are arranged is determined at the address corresponding to the case where the winning is won. Stores index data to be specified. For this reason, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn in the range of 4 frames to the maximum, and the number of sliding symbols to be drawn so that the winning combinations are not aligned is determined. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames that do not have any winning combination is defined is created, and the reel stopping control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop them together. The symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  Also, in the table index, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, such as when a special role is won while the special role has been carried over from the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus) The address corresponding to (1) + Bell, etc.) has a number of sliding symbols so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning special role is in the range of up to 4 frames. For the stop operation position that cannot be pulled in, index data is stored to specify the table creation data with the number of sliding frames determined so that the selected small part can be pulled to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and reel stop control is performed. Is done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to align and stop them. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In addition, in the table index, when a special player and a replaying player are elected at the same time, such as when a replaying player is won in a state where the special player has been carried over from before the previous game (big bonus (1) + replay ( 1) etc.), the address corresponding to 1), etc. is stored with index data for specifying data for creating a table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to draw the re-gamer to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the reel stop control Is done. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line simultaneously with the re-playing combination.

  Further, in the table index, when a plurality of re-playing roles are won and when a special role and a plurality of re-playing roles are won (replay (1) + replay (2), big bonus (1) + replay (1) + In the address corresponding to replay (2), etc., a range of 4 frames is included in the replaying role (in this embodiment, replays (2) to (4)) determined as the priority replaying role among the selected replaying roles. The number of sliding tops is determined so that it can be pulled in as much as possible, and for the stop operation position where the selected priority re-gamer cannot be pulled in a range of up to 4 frames, Index data for specifying data for creating a table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within the range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the priority re-gamer who has been elected within the drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line can be stopped together, the control for stopping the same can be performed. If the priority re-gamer symbol that has been won on the winning line with a draw range of up to 4 frames cannot be drawn in, the other re-wins on the win line with a draw range of up to 4 frames If it is possible to stop the game figures together, the control to stop them will be performed, and the control of the winning combination will be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. . That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the priority re-gamer on the winning line among the plurality of re-games, and when the priority re-gamer cannot be drawn, other re-games can be awarded. It becomes possible. In the case where a priority re-game player and another re-game player can be withdrawn at the same time, the priority re-game player will be drawn in, and the selected priority re-game player and other re-game players will not be on the winning line at the same time. It is like that. In addition, as described above, the “replay” that is a symbol constituting the re-playing combination is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, if a special combination and a plurality of re-game players are elected, be sure to select either one regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. The re-playing role will be won together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line simultaneously with the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, when the winning flag for the bell is set and the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. In the state where the stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 is created and the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, When a stop control table is created that draws the symbols on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames, and the middle reel and the right reel are stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is placed on the winning line L1. When the left reel is stopped after that, the winning symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. Also, on the left reel, there is no “cherry” symbol placed one symbol below and two symbols below the “bell” symbol, so regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. , Bell and Cherry won't win at the same time. If the left reel is stopped while all the reels are still rotating when the bell winning flag is set, except for the case where the bell and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “bell” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combination of bells can be aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4.

  In addition, when the winning flag of any one of the replays (1) to (4) is set and the left reel is still rotating, the “replay” is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table for drawing the symbols on the winning line L3 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L3 of the middle reel or the right reel, As the stop control table, the winning symbols corresponding to replays (1) to (4) (replay (1) “replay” symbol at the time of winning, replay (2) “red 7” symbol at the time of winning, replay ( 3) “White 7” symbol if winning and “Black BAR” symbol if winning (3) on the winning line L2 within the draw range of 4 frames. If the winning symbols corresponding to the (2) to (4) are not drawn on the winning line L3 within the draw range of 4 frames, the “replay” symbols corresponding to the replay (1) are 4 frames. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L3 in the drawing range is created. When the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L3, and then left When the reels are stopped, the winning symbols corresponding to replays (1) to (4) are controlled on the winning line L3 within the draw range of 4 frames, and the replays (2) to (4) are won. If the winning symbol corresponding to replays (2) to (4) cannot be drawn on the winning line L3 in the pull-in range of 4 frames at times, the “replay” symbol corresponding to replay (1) is pulled into 4 frames. Enter in range Control is performed to pull on the line L3. At this time, if the winning symbol corresponding to the replays (2) to (4) can be drawn on the winning line L3 within the drawing range of 4 frames, the winning symbol corresponding to the replays (2) to (4) is selected as the winning line L3. If the control for drawing up is performed and the winning symbol corresponding to replays (2) to (4) cannot be drawn on the winning line L3 within the drawing range of 4 frames, “replay” corresponding to replay (1) Is controlled on the winning line L3 within the drawing range of 4 frames. On the left reel, the “Cherry” symbol is not placed 2 positions below the “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol, or “Black BAR” symbol. Regardless of the operation timing of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the replays (1) to (4) and the cherry will not win simultaneously.

  In the middle reel, there is a “bell” symbol (“replay” symbol of area number 8) placed one symbol below the “replay” symbol, but within the pull-in range of four symbols, Since there is a “replay” symbol (region number 4 “replay” symbol) where no “bell” symbol is located, the “replay” symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel and the “replay” symbol is on the left reel. Is stopped at the upper stage, and when the “black BAR” symbol is stopped at the lower stage, the combination of one (3) is not aligned on the winning line L1, and the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Regardless of the timing, replay and one (3) will not win simultaneously. In addition, since the “bell” symbol is not placed on one “replay” symbol on the middle reel, the “replay” symbol stops at the middle of the middle reel and the “replay” symbol stops on the lower reel. In this case, the combination of one (1) to (3) is not aligned on the winning line L1, and one replay and one (1) are performed regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. ~ (3) will not win at the same time. If the winning flag of any one of the replays (1) to (4) is set and the left reel is stopped while all reels are still rotating, the replay (1 ) And Cherry win at the same time, a stop control table for drawing the winning symbol into any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combinations of replays (1) to (4) can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L4.

  In addition, when one of the winning flags (1) to (3) is set and the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol is always used as the middle reel stop control table. A stop control table for drawing into the middle stage in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel is stopped before the left reel, control for drawing the “bell” symbol into the middle stage is performed. On the left reel, there are “Cherry” symbols on 2 symbols above and 2 symbols of “Red 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol and “Black BAR” symbol that constitutes one (1) to (3). It is not arranged, and even if these “Red 7”, “White 7”, and “Black BAR” symbols are stopped at the upper or lower level, the cherry won't win a prize. Even if the winning reel in the state (3) is set, even if the middle reel stops before the left reel, the winning line where one (1) to (3) can be combined is restricted. There is no end.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for bell and replay (1) is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, for “watermelon”, there are portions arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, intervals exceeding 4 frames, on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the combination of watermelons is complete. If the stop operation is not performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line, the watermelon combinations cannot be aligned. For this reason, when a watermelon is won, if the left reel is stopped at a timing other than the 4-frame pull-in range, the combination of watermelons will not be aligned on any winning line, and will be missed.

  As for “Cherry”, there are places on the left reel that are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and the stop operation is performed in the drawing range of 4 frames with respect to the winning line where the combinations of cherries can be arranged. If you don't do it, you won't be able to make a cherry combination. For this reason, when winning the cherry, if the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 1-6, 13-19, 21, the combination of cherries is aligned on one of the winning lines, and the other When the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at the timing, that is, the timings of the region numbers 7 to 12 and 20, the combination of cherries will not be aligned on any winning line and will be missed.

  Further, since only one “red 7”, “white 7”, and “black BAR” are arranged on the left reel, one (1), one (2), one (3) If the stop operation is not performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where combinations can be matched, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 The combination of sheets (3) cannot be aligned. For this reason, when winning the big bonus (1) and 1 (1), the combination of the big bonus (1) and 1 (1) only when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 3 to 9 Can be placed on any one of the pay lines, and when the left reel is stopped at other timings, that is, at the timings of the area numbers 1, 2, 10 to 21, the big bonus (1) The combination of one (1) is not aligned with any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when winning the big bonus (2) and 1 (2), the combination of the big bonus (2) and 1 (2) is only possible when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 10 to 16. It is possible to win along with any of the winning lines, and when the left reel is stopped at other timings, that is, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 9 and 17 to 21, the big bonus (2), The combination of one (2) will not be on any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when the regular bonus, one (3) is elected, the combination of the regular bonus, one (3) is selected only when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 1, 2, 18-21. It is possible to win in line with the other winning lines, and when the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at other timings, that is, the timings of the area numbers 3 to 16, any combination of the regular bonus and the one (3) Will not be on the winning line and will be missed.

  Further, as described above, since only one “red 7”, “white 7”, and “black BAR” are arranged on the left reel, replay (2), replay (3), and replay (4). If the stop operation is not performed within the drawing range of 4 frames on the winning line where the combinations of the replays can be arranged, the replay (2), replay (3), and replay (4) combinations cannot be arranged. Therefore, when the replay (2) is won, the replay (2) is performed when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 3 to 9 (area numbers 4 to 8 in the case of other than the left reel first stop). The winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines, and other timings, that is, the timings of the region numbers 1, 2, 10 to 21 (region numbers 1 to 3 and 9 to 21 in cases other than the left reel first stop). When the left reel is stopped, the combination of replays (2) is not aligned with any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when the replay (3) is won, the combination of the replay (3) is performed when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 10 to 16 (area numbers 11 to 15 in the case of other than the left reel first stop). Are aligned on one of the winning lines, and at other timings, that is, at the timings of region numbers 1 to 9 and 17 to 21 (region numbers 1 to 10 and 16 to 21 in the case of other than the left reel first stop). When the left reel is stopped, the combination of replays (3) is not aligned with any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when the replay (4) is won, the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the region numbers 1, 2, 18 to 21 (region numbers 1, 19 to 21 in the case of other than the first stop of the left reel). The combination of replay (4) wins in line with one of the winning lines, and the left reel at the other timing, that is, the timing of area numbers 3 to 16 (area numbers 2 to 17 in cases other than the first stop of the left reel). When the stop operation is performed, the combination of the replay (4) is not aligned with any winning line, and is lost. However, in this embodiment, since replay (2), replay (3), and replay (4) are always won simultaneously with replay (1), replay (2), replay (3), and replay (4) Even if the player misses the winning combination, the combination of replays (1) will be awarded on any winning line.

  In this embodiment, a display mode (region numbers 1 to 3 and 3-5) in which the “red 7” symbol stops at either the upper or lower level of the left reel, and the “white 7” symbol is the upper or lower level of the left reel. Display mode (region numbers 8-10, 10-12) and display mode (region numbers 15-17, 17-12) where the “black BAR” symbol stops at either the top or bottom of the left reel 19) are arranged in excess of 4 frames which are the maximum pull-in ranges.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 3 to 9) at which a maximum of 4 frames of “red 7” symbols can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, “white 7” is displayed. You can draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “Black” and “Black BAR” symbols and stop them on any winning line, or you can draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “White 7” symbols and stop them on any winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 10 to 16), the “red 7” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol can be drawn on a maximum of four frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 9, 17 to 21) where a maximum of 4 frames of the “black BAR” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, "Design and" white 7 "design Also it is stopped on any pay line by drawing a large four-frame, so as not be. That is, the “white 7” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. The “Red 7” symbol and the “Black BAR” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. The “Red 7” symbol and the “Red 7” symbol and the “White 7” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed within the range where the can be drawn on the winning line. Since the “white 7” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol are arranged, there is no stop operation position where the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, and the “black BAR” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, for each of the areas on the left reel, there is an area where the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, or the “black BAR” symbol is drawn on any winning line, and the “red 7” symbol. , There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the “white 7” symbol or the “black BAR” symbol on the winning line. That is, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “Red 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol, or “Black BAR” symbol. The “black” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line.

  In addition, as described above, when one of the winning flags (1) to (3) is set, if the middle reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” must be displayed in the middle. In this case, even if this is the case for “Red 7”, the control for drawing in the symbol is performed, and the winning line in which the combinations of one (1) to (3) can be arranged is not limited. There is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the symbols “White 7”, “Black 7” or “Black BAR”, and the “Red 7”, “White 7” and “ The “Black BAR” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. In this embodiment, the chance is the initial game state, when any bonus is won in RT (1) or RT (2), or cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 This is a display mode that can be derived when one of the sheets (3) is won. In this embodiment, the left reel is set to the first stop, or the right reel is set to the first stop, and the left reel is set to On the condition that the second stop is set, the display result of the left reel is “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” of No. 3-5, “White 7 / Orange / Replay” of No. 10-12 or 17˜ The 19th symbol “Black BAR / Bel / Orange” is stopped, and a display mode in which none of the combinations are on the winning line is applied as a chance.

  The reach is derived only when one of the bonuses (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the initial game state, RT (1), or RT (2). In this embodiment, the display result of the left reel is that the left reel is set to the first stop, or the right reel is set to the first stop and the left reel is set to the second stop. As shown in the figure, “Replay Cherry Bell” on the 12th to 14th symbols is stopped, and all the roles are not on the winning line (even if the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel, it is not on the winning line) , Will not be awarded) will be applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) and regular bonus, the “Watermelon Black BAR Bell” of the 16th to 18th symbols will stop, The display mode that is not on the screen is applied as the reach of Big Bonus (1) and Big Bonus (2), and the “Replay Cherry Bell” of symbols 20, 21, and 1 are stopped, Display mode that is not aligned on the winning line (even if the cherry stops in the middle of the left reel, it will not be on the winning line, so it will not win) is applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) is doing.

  In the present embodiment, the stop operation is performed with the left reel as the first stop, that is, the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed in the order of left, middle, right, left, right, and middle. It has been performed, or the right reel is set to the first stop and the left reel is set to the second stop, that is, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed in the order of right, left, and middle. (If the middle reel is in the first stop, the same display mode as the reach eye is derived when the bonus is not won, Even if one of the sheets (1) to (3) is not won, the same display mode as the chance may be derived.) However, the operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed. Regardless of the order, chances and reach were established It may be so that.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the reel that may miss one (1) to (3) is only the left reel, and one of the one (1) to (3) is selected. When the left reel is set to the first stop, the right reel is set to the first stop, the left reel is set to the first stop, and a specific display result constituting a chance eye is derived when it is missed. However, a specific display result constituting the chance eye may be derived when the middle reel is set to the first stop and the left reel is missed.

  In addition, a plurality of reels are applied as reels that may miss one (1) to (3), and one of these (1) to (3) is selected and these reels are selected. When one of the sheets (1) to (3) is missed at the time of stopping, a specific display result constituting the chance eye may be derived. Also in this case, the chances may be established on the condition that the stop operation is performed in a specific stop order, or the chances may be established regardless of the stop order.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when deriving the chance and reach eyes will be described. One of the bonuses is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), and any other If the role is not elected, the 3rd to 5th symbol “Red 7 Watermelon White BAR”, the 10th to 12th symbol “White 7 Orange Replay”, and the 17th to 19th symbol “Black” A stop control table capable of specifying “BAR, bell, orange” as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  If only one (1) is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), one of the display results constituting the chance will be awarded (1) Stop control that can specify “White 7 Orange Replay” of symbols 10-12 and “Black BAR Bell Orange” of symbols 17-19 as display results when a stop operation is performed at a timing when it cannot be performed The table is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), one (2) of the display results constituting the chance eye is won. When a stop operation is performed at a timing that cannot be performed, the display results can be specified as the display results of “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” of No. 3-5 and “Black BAR / Bel / Orange” of No. 17-19 A stop control table is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  Also, if only one (3) is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), one (3) of the display results constituting the chance eye is won. When a stop operation is performed at a timing that cannot be done, the display result can be specified as the display result of “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” of No. 3-5 and “White 7 / Orange / Replay” of No. 10-12 A stop control table is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when any bonus is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2) and no other combination is won, or in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or When only one (1) is won in RT (2), the initial gaming state, when only one (2) is won in RT (1) or RT (2), or the initial gaming state When only one sheet (3) is won in RT (1) or RT (2), reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) is placed on the winning line. If it cannot be stopped, it will be possible to derive the display results of “White 7 / Orange / Replay” for the 10th to 12th symbols and “Black BAR / Bel / Orange” for the 17th to 19th symbols. When only one (2) is elected in the state, RT (1), or RT (2), the “white 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (2) may be stopped on the winning line If this is not possible, it is possible to derive the display results of “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” of No. 3-5, and “Black BAR / Bel / Orange” of No. 17-19. Configure the combination When the “Black BAR” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” of the 3rd to 5th symbols and the “White 7 / Orange / Replay” of the 10th to 12th symbols are displayed. As a result, it can be derived.

  In addition, if neither role is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the 3rd to 5th symbols “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” constituting the chance eye, A stop control table capable of specifying display results other than “white 7 / orange / replay” for symbols 10 to 12 and “black BAR / bell / orange” for symbols 17 to 19 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. It has become so. Thus, when any of the roles is not won in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive a chance. Become.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except in the case where there is a possibility that the user will be lost. In other words, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Unless there is a possibility that a winning combination may win from the display result of reels that have already been stopped, one (1) in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2) If one (2), one (3) is won, or if any bonus is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. If no combination is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table in which no chance is derived.

  In this embodiment, when only one (1) is elected in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), and in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2) If only one (2) is elected, and only one (3) is elected in the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the middle reel is ahead of the left reel. When stopped, the “bell” symbol always stops at the middle stage of the middle reel as described above. For this reason, when only one (1) is won, if the “Red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, the reel stop control is performed so that no other small role winning is generated. In the left reel, the “White 7” symbol and the “Black BAR” symbol do not stop on any winning line, and only one (2) is selected and “White 7” If the symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, reel stop control is performed so that other small roles do not win, and the “red 7” symbol and “black BAR” symbol are always displayed on the left reel. There will be no stop on the winning line, and if only one (3) is selected and the “Black BAR” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, another small role will win To prevent the reels from being stopped. Not be in the left reel "red 7" symbol and "white 7" symbol is stopped in any of the winning line, there is no possibility that chance eyes is derived.

  On the other hand, if only one (1) is won in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and one (2) in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2) ) Only in the initial game state, RT (1), or RT (2), with only one (3) selected, stop the right reel first, When the left reel is stopped before stopping, the symbols “Red 7 / Watermelon / White BAR” of No. 3-5, “White 7 / Orange / Replay” of No. 10-12, and No. 17-19 Even if “black BAR / bell / orange” is derived as the display result, it is possible to avoid the combination of one (1) to (3) not winning depending on the stop position of the middle reel. If the stopping order is like this, chances are derived. There is.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the CPU 41a continues the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In this embodiment, when one of the cards (1) to (3) wins in the initial gaming state (when the combination of one (1) to (3) is aligned on any winning line) The lottery probability of special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles is the same as the initial gaming state, but the combined probability of replays (1) to (4) is higher than the initial gaming state. In addition, the replay time (1) (RT (1)) in which the expected increase / decrease rate of medals per game (the winning probability of the target combination × the total number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) is 1 or less To control. While the gaming state is at RT (1), the flag during RT (1) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, RT (1) does not win any bonus or any falling combination (in this embodiment, replays (2) to (4)), and the prescribed number of games (in this embodiment, 1 (1)) Either 200 games if winning, 250 games if winning (2), 300 games if winning (1) (3), or before reaching the specified number of games It ends by winning a bonus. If any bonus is won during RT (1), RT (1) will continue even if the falling role wins until the specified number of games is reached or the winning bonus is won. It never ends.

  In addition, when any one of the replays (2) to (4) wins in the initial game state (when any of the replays (2) to (4) is arranged on any winning line), the special role (special Only when the winning combination has not been carried over) and the lottery probability of the small role is the same as the initial gaming state, but the combined probability of replays (1) to (4) is higher than the initial gaming state, and per game The replay time (2) (RT (2)) in which the expected increase / decrease rate of the medal (the winning probability of the target combination x the total number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1 is controlled. While the gaming state is at RT (2), the flag during RT (2) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, RT (2) does not win any bonus or any falling combination (in this example, 1 (1) to (3)), and the prescribed number of games (in this example, replay (2)) 50 games at the time of winning the game, 100 games at the time of winning the replay (3), 150 games at the time of winning the replay (4), or before reaching the prescribed number of games It ends by winning one of the bonuses or by winning one of the falls. If any bonus is won during RT (2), RT will end even if the falling role wins until the specified number of games is reached or until the winning bonus is won. There is no.

  Note that RT (2) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and RT (1) ends even if any of replays (2) to (4) wins during RT (1). Once it is controlled to RT (1), RT (1) is finished, and after that, it can move to RT (2) until winning in replays (2) to (4) in the initial state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the expected increase rate of medals per game in the initial gaming state is 0.52 according to the lottery probability in FIG. ) The expected increase / decrease rate of medals per game is 0.41 according to the lottery probability in FIG. 8, which is about 1.78 medals per game, while RT The expected increase / decrease rate of medals per game in (2) is 1.13 according to the lottery probability shown in FIG. 9, and approximately 0.39 medals increase per game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the gaming state after the initial gaming state, that is, after the bonus ends, after the setting is changed, after the end of RT (1), or after the end of RT (2), RT cannot be expected to increase. (1) There is a possibility of shifting to both RT (2) where an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once the transition from the initial gaming state to RT (2), the opportunity to transition to RT (2) again is provided even after RT (2) is completed, and RT (2) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (1), there is no transition to RT (2) until the end of RT (1), but when RT (1) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to shift to RT (2) periodically comes. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that can be shifted to RT (2) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (1), it shifts to RT (2). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In the initial gaming state, the winning probabilities are set in the order of replay (2), replay (3), and replay (4). RT (2) and replay (3 ) Is set in the order of RT (2) shifted to the trigger, and RT (2) shifted to the trigger of the replay (2). For this reason, the probability of winning in the order of replay (2), replay (3), and replay (4) is low, but the type of replay with the lower probability of winning has a larger number of prescribed games when winning (RT (2) Will be controlled.

  On the other hand, in the initial game state, the operation procedure is common with Replay (4) (3), the operation procedure is common with Replay (3) (2), and the operation procedure is common with Replay (2). The winning probabilities are set in the order of 1 (1), and RT (1), 1 (1), and 1 (2), RT (1), 1 (1), 1 A large number of prescribed games are set in the order of RT (1) shifted to (1) as a trigger. For this reason, in the initial game state, by performing the stop operation in the replay (4) operation procedure, there is a probability of shifting to RT (2) having a large number of prescribed games, that is, RT (2) having a relatively high advantage. On the other hand, the probability of shifting to RT (1) is high, and the number of prescribed games when shifting to RT (1) also increases. In addition, by performing the stop operation in the replay (2) operation procedure, the probability of shifting to RT (2) having a small number of prescribed games, that is, RT (2) having a relatively low advantage is increased. The probability of shifting to (1) is low, and the number of prescribed games when shifting to RT (1) also decreases.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can select the high risk / high return gameability by selecting the operation procedure, or can select the low risk / low return gameability.

  In this embodiment, if any one of the cards (1) to (3) wins in the initial gaming state, the player moves to RT (1), which is disadvantageous for the player. Only one “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol, and “black BAR” symbol of the left reel constituting the sheet (1), one (2), and one (3) are arranged on the left reel. 1 (1), 1 (1), 1 (2), and 1 (1) unless a stop operation is performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where the combination of 1 (2), 1 (3) can be aligned. It is possible to avoid the combination of one sheet (2) and one sheet (3). As a result, the stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation procedure that avoids the combination of 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), and 1 sheet (3), thereby shifting to RT (1), which is disadvantageous for the player. Can be avoided.

  However, the “Red 7”, “White 7” and “Black BAR” symbols on the left reel that make up 1 (1), 1 (2) and 1 (3) are intentionally placed on the winning line. Since it cannot be stopped, the “bell” symbols on the middle reel and right reel that make up one (1), one (2), and one (3) will always stop on the winning line. In the initial gaming state, when one (1) to (3) is won, it is impossible to intentionally remove it without knowing the type, and one (1) won with a probability of 2/3 -(3) will be missed, but the winning one (1)-(3) will win with a 1/3 chance and will shift to RT (1), which is disadvantageous for the player .

  In addition, when any of the replays (2) to (4) wins in the initial gaming state, the game shifts to RT (2) where an increase in medals can be expected, but the replays (2) to (4) of the present embodiment. Since the stop operation cannot be performed simultaneously aiming at the “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol and “black BAR” symbol of the left reel that constitutes the game, any of the replays (2) to (4) in the initial gaming state If you don't know the type, you wo n’t be able to win the replays (2) to (4), and the replays (2) to (4 ) Can be transferred to RT (2), but the replays (2) to (4) won with a 2/3 chance will be missed. In this case, transfer to RT (2). I can't.

  In addition, if a falling combination wins during RT (2), RT (2) will end even before reaching the specified number of games from the start of RT (2). Each of the left reel composing one (1), one (2) and one (3) is “red 7”, “white 7” and “black BAR”. Since only one frame (1), one sheet (2), and one sheet (3) can be combined, one sheet (1) unless a stop operation is performed within the draw range of four frames on the winning line where the combination of one sheet (1), one sheet (2), and one sheet (3) can be aligned. 1) In addition to avoiding the combination of 1 (2) and 1 (3), even if the symbols that make up the special combination on the left reel stop on any winning line, Between four or more symbols that constitute a special combination on the middle reel and right reel The poured are arranged, since the stopping operation position not retracted the configuration pattern is present, can be avoided that a combination of special combination is aligned. As a result, by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of a falling combination or special combination, even if the falling combination or special combination is elected, these falling combination or special combination wins and RT ( It is possible to avoid the end of 2).

  However, the “reel 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol, and “black BAR” symbol of the left reel that constitutes one (1), one (2), and one (3), which are the fallers of this embodiment. Cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, and the "bell" symbols on the middle reel and right reel that make up one (1), one (2), and one (3) must be on the winning line. Since it will stop at the top, if the falling role is elected during RT (2), it is impossible to intentionally remove the falling role if the type is not known, and it will be won with a probability of 2/3 However, RT (2) will be terminated if the winning combination with a probability of 1/3 wins and no bonus has been won.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus, are stored. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 terminates the big bonus before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode) and when an unrecoverable error (disconnection error, RAM error, abnormal winning error) occurs. When the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, when four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initials with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition To do.

  Initialization 1 is a state in which the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, initialization performed before that and an error that cannot be recovered (disconnection abnormality error, RAM abnormality error, In the initialization 1, all the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the used stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, and a power-on command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and paying out credits is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted at the end of setting, that is, at the end of the setting change mode.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent at a time before

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed until the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table includes specific commands (a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning, a payout start command, a payout end, a gaming state command indicating the end of a big bonus, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting A specific control pattern to be referred to when receiving an end command, a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, and the like, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving the specific command. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. Further, when a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When a payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, the other effects and the effects accompanying the payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when continuous effects and additional effects to be described later are being executed, the results of these effects are the results indicating the winning of the bonus, and when the final effects to be described later are executed in the setting operation of the betting number of the next game, When the finalized effect is executed, when the bonus bonus effect accompanying the big bonus or the regular bonus is executed, when the two-dimensional code that can specify the privilege acquisition information described later is displayed, Execution is prohibited, and even if a standby command is received in such a state, the demo pattern is not referred to as a control pattern, and the demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 detects a voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98 and when a V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period of time, the display control is performed. When the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period of time despite the instruction to the circuit 92, the interruption interruption process (sub) similar to the interruption interruption process (main) is performed. Run. In the power interruption interrupt process (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 91c. ing. Thereafter, the CPU 91a shifts to a loop process in which no processing is performed. However, when a V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 to be described later is not input for a certain period of time, or when the display control circuit 92 is instructed. In spite of this, if the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period of time, it is not the case that the drive voltage has dropped, and then reset When the reset signal is output from the circuit 95, the CPU 91a is restarted.

  The CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup (restart), confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, and the RAM parity is 0. On the condition that the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct, the effect state before power interruption (specifically, the state when the last command was received before power interruption) is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c. It is like that. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destructive diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. All areas of the RAM 91c are initialized.

  Thus, in this embodiment, not only when the CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal, but also when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period, The power interruption interrupt process (sub) is executed even when the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period of time despite the instruction, that is, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up for some reason. After that, the CPU 91a is restarted. As the CPU 91a is restarted, the display control circuit 92 is initialized so that the control of the CPU 91a is resumed from the state before the display control circuit 92 is hung up.

  In addition, the CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the production regardless of whether or not the production state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  On the other hand, if the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period of time, the CPU 91a outputs a completion interrupt signal corresponding to the command, even though it instructs the display control circuit 92. When no input is made for a certain period, that is, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up for some reason, a restart flag is set in the RAM 91c before the power interruption processing (sub) is executed, By determining whether or not there is a restart flag, it is possible to distinguish whether it is a start-up due to power-on or a restart due to a hang-up of the display control circuit 92.

  If the CPU 91a determines that the display control circuit 92 is restarted due to a hang-up, and if the CPU 91a can return to the effect state before the restart, the CPU 91a does not wait for the reception of the initialization command or the power-on command. It is designed to return to the production state before startup. For this reason, although the CPU 91a is not activated by turning on the power but restarted by the hang-up of the display control circuit 92, the initialization command and the power-on command cannot be received, and the production is not performed. Can be prevented.

  The CPU 91a also has a date and time setting operation screen (not shown) that allows a predetermined date and time setting operation when the date and time information is not set by the clock device 97, that is, when the date and time information is reset. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the date and time of the clock device 97 is set by operating the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 while the date and time setting operation screen is displayed. Take control.

  The date and time (date, time) of the timepiece device 97 is set, for example, by connecting an external timepiece device (the timepiece device) to the connector on the effect control board 90 into which the connector of the wiring extending from the game control board 40 (effect relay board 80) is inserted. The CPU 91a monitors the acquisition of the date / time setting command indicating the date / time information output from the external clock device, and has acquired the date / time setting command output from the external clock device. The date and time of the timepiece device 97 mounted on the effect control board 90 may be set based on the above. In this way, for example, an operation switch for adjusting the date and time is provided on the production control board 90, and the date and time can be easily set even if the operator does not set the date and time by operating the operation switch while looking at the external clock. Can be done.

  In addition, the CPU 91a controls the liquid crystal display 51 to display a predetermined menu screen that enables browsing of the above-described date and time setting operation screen and setting change history information at the time of activation, and is displayed on the menu screen. When one of the various menu items is selected, processing corresponding to the selected item is performed.

  In other words, if you select the date / time setting item from the various menu items displayed on the menu screen, the date / time setting operation screen will be displayed, allowing you to set date / time information. The setting change history information browsing screen is displayed, and the setting change history information can be browsed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the date and time information of the clock device 97 is not set when the CPU 91a is activated, that is, when the date and time information is initialized, the date and time setting item is displayed on the menu screen. The menu screen cannot be cleared until the date and time information setting operation is performed, and it is possible to prevent the business from starting without the date and time information of the clock device 97 being set.

  When receiving the internal winning command, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 stores the winning status of the internal winning flag specified from the internal winning command and the type of the internal winning flag established in the RAM 91c, and then the internal winning command. Is held until it is updated. When the reel stop command is received, the stop reel specified from the reel stop command, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel are stored in the RAM 91c, and then the reel rotation start command Is held, that is, until the rotation of the reel in the next game is started, and erased as the rotation starts. When a winning determination command is received, the presence / absence of a winning specified from the winning determination command, the type of winning, and the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are stored in the RAM 91c until the winning determination command is received and updated. Hold. When the gaming state command is received, the gaming state of the next game specified from the gaming state command (initial gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), big bonus) Whether the game is in a regular bonus, etc.) and the remaining number of RT games are stored in the RAM 91c, and held until the next game state command is received and updated.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 produces an effect according to the effect mode selected from the plurality of effect modes by the player. Here, for example, there are three types of effect modes: modes 1 to 3. In modes 1 to 3, the type of character appearing in the production (including the continuous production), the type of image used for the background of the production, the execution probability of the production, the execution mode, and the like are different. However, there may be the same effect pattern for each of the modes 1 to 3.

  The effect mode can be switched by operating the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 of the player. Specifically, when the selection switch 56 is operated, a menu screen on which a plurality of menu items are arranged is displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In this state, the selection switch 56 is further pressed. By operating, the cursor on the menu screen is moved, and by operating the determination switch 57 in a state where the cursor selects the item of the effect mode selection menu, the effect mode selection screen in which the items of the effect modes 1 and 2 are arranged Is displayed. Further, by operating the selection switch while the production mode selection screen is displayed, the cursor of the production mode selection screen is moved, and the decision switch 57 is operated while the desired production mode item is selected. The selected production mode is set. Until the start switch 7 or the settlement switch 10 is operated after the betting number is set (after receiving the gaming state command or the standby command, the internal winning command is received after the first BET command is received). , Or until the standby command for paying the bet amount is received) and during the game from the operation of the start switch 7 to the derivation of the display result on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (internal winning command) The period until the game state command is received), and when the betting number setting state or the continuous effect or additional effect described below is executed even if the game is not in progress, the regular bonus effect described later When the big bonus effect is executed, when the final effect described later is executed, the secondary information that can specify the privilege acquisition information described later When the code is displayed, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is invalidated, so that the menu screen cannot be displayed. In these cases, the rendering mode is not switched. It has become.

  The effect mode selected on the effect mode selection screen is set in the RAM 91c, is referred to when determining the effect pattern in each game, and the effect pattern is determined based on the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c. As a result, the type of character appearing in the effect, the type of image used for the background of the effect, the execution probability of the effect, the execution mode, and the like are different between mode 1 and mode 2.

  A game history storage area is allocated to the RAM 41c of the sub-control unit 91, and the CPU 91a stores the game history in the slot machine in the game history storage area based on the command received from the main control unit 41. ing. In the game history storage area, the number of big bonuses (1), the number of big bonuses (2), the number of regular bonuses (excluding those in the big bonus), the number of games since the end of the previous bonus (game between bonuses) Number), a total number of games of the day, and a game history storage area each of which is a difference number of the day (payout number-insertion number) is allocated. Each of these areas is based on a command received from the main control unit 41. CPU91a updates.

  Then, the CPU 91a performs a history display effect in which the game history stored in the game history storage area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the player's operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57. Specifically, when the selection switch 56 is operated, the above-described menu screen is displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In this state, the selection switch 56 is further operated to thereby display the menu screen. The game history screen is displayed by moving the cursor and operating the determination switch 57 in a state where the cursor selects an item of the game history. The bet number setting state from when the bet number is set until the start switch 7 is operated or the settlement switch 10 is operated, and the display on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the start switch 7 operation. When a game is in progress until the result is derived, and when a betting number setting state or a continuous effect or an additional effect, which will be described later, is executed even if the game is not in progress, a regular bonus effect or a big bonus effect described later is executed. If the finalized effect described later is being executed, or if a two-dimensional code capable of specifying privilege acquisition information described later is displayed, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is invalidated. The menu screen cannot be displayed. In these cases, the game history cannot be browsed.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 receives a standby command from the main control unit 41, that is, when an operation for progressing the game is not performed continuously for a certain time or more after the end of one game, When a credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed, a predetermined demonstration image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to perform the demonstration effect described above. In addition, when a continuous effect or an additional effect, which will be described later, is executed, when a final effect is executed by setting the number of bets, when a final effect is already executed, a regular bonus effect or a big bonus effect is executed. If a two-dimensional code that can identify privilege acquisition information to be described later is displayed, an operation for progressing the game is not performed continuously for a certain period of time or longer, and the standby from the main control unit 41 Even when a command is received or when a credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed and a standby command is received from the main control unit 41, a demonstration effect is not performed. In addition, in a state where a continuous effect or an additional effect, a regular bonus effect, and a big bonus effect, which will be described later, are being performed, a game sound effect (BGM) is output even after the game ends while the effect continues. If a stand-by command is received in such a state, the demonstration effect is not performed, but the control is performed so that the volume is set to the minimum (silence), and then the bet number setting operation is performed as the game progresses. When the BET command is received, the volume being muted is returned to the original level.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 receives an error command indicating the occurrence of an error from the main control unit 41, that is, when an error occurs on the main control unit 41 side, the CPU 91a indicates the occurrence of an error on the liquid crystal display 51. An error notification screen is displayed to notify the occurrence of an error to the outside. The error notification effect is continuously executed until an error command indicating the cancellation of the error is received from the main control unit 41. The error notification is terminated by receiving the error command indicating the error cancellation, and is executed when an error occurs. It returns to the production state that it had been.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 acquires a reel stop command for all reels after a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, that is, after acquiring the reel rotation start command. When a predetermined time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses without being promoted, a promotion notification that prompts a stop operation of the reel is performed. Further, particularly in a state where a continuous effect or an additional effect, a regular bonus effect, or a big bonus effect is being performed, a promotion notification is made when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the reel starts rotating. In addition, control is performed to minimize (mute) the volume of the game sound effect, and thereafter, when a reel stop command is received for all reels, the volume being muted is restored to the original level.

  As an effect performed by the CPU 91a of the present embodiment, particularly as an effect performed on the liquid crystal display 51, a chance zone that is executed when the game state is the initial game state, RT (2), regular bonus, or big bonus, respectively. Production, RT (2) production, regular bonus production or big bonus production, continuous execution over multiple games, and continuous production and additional production that leads to a production result indicating whether or not the bonus is finally won, RT When (2) ends due to the winning of a falling combination, there is an end-of-fall effect that leads to an effect result indicating whether or not the bonus is won in the next game after the end of the game. Furthermore, when either the general role or the special role is elected in the initial game state or RT (1), RT (2), an effect indicating that the general role is won (small role announcement effect) There is also a single production including The execution mode of these effects differs depending on the above-described effect modes.

  In addition, the CPU 91a performs an effect indicating that any bonus is won or an effect indicating that any bonus is won during the RT (2) effect, except during the RT (2) effect described above. Later, when the RT (2) effect is finished, when the number of bets for the next game is initially set (when a medal is inserted, or when one BET switch 5 or MAXBET switch 6 is operated, That is, when the BET command is received for the first time, a confirmation screen indicating the confirmation of the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a confirmed effect for notifying the player that the winning of the bonus has been confirmed is executed. The final production will continue until the winning bonus is won (until the winning command indicating the winning bonus is received), and the winning bonus will be won (the winning bonus won) Is received).

  Next, the chance zone effect and the RT (2) effect will be described.

  When the bet number setting operation of the next game is performed after the end of the bonus, after the setting is changed, after the end of RT (1) or after the end of RT (2) (the gaming state command indicating the end of the bonus, After receiving the initialization command, the gaming state command indicating the end of RT (1), or the gaming state command indicating the end of RT (2) and receiving the BET command for the first time, the chance zone effect is started. The chance zone effect is an effect unique to the initial game state, and ends with the end of the initial game state (reception of a game state command indicating the end of the initial game state).

  In the chance zone effect, in the initial game state, when one of the replays (2) to (4), 1 (1) to (3) is won (replay (2) to (4), 1 (1) to (When an internal winning flag indicating any of the winnings in (3) is received), a transition role that notifies that one of the replays (2) to (4) or one of the sheets (1) to (3) has been won It includes a winning combination notification and a transition combination type notification for notifying the type of winning combination (replay or 10 types specified from the internal winning flag).

  The transition role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the transition role that has been elected, the type of the transition role that has been elected, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of the transition role, and the types of these transition roles May be notified by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 an image suggesting the above, or may be notified by lighting a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. In addition, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the transitional role (such as a symbol that is located near the structural symbol of the transitional role and stands out from the structural symbol of the transitional role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  During the big bonus, the CPU 91a determines whether or not to execute the transition combination type notification in the initial gaming state after the end of the big bonus until the next bonus is won, and the falling combination type notification described later in RT (2). The transition combination and the falling combination type notification lottery for determining whether or not to execute is executed, and when the transition combination and the falling combination type notification lottery is won, a notification winning flag is set in the RAM 91c. After that, when one of the replays (2) to (4) and one (1) to (3) is won in the initial game state until the next bonus is won (replay (2) to (4) When the internal winning flag indicating the winning of any one of (1) to (3) is received), it is determined whether or not the notification winning flag is set, and the notification winning flag is set In this case, a notification execution lottery for determining whether or not to actually execute the transition combination type notification is executed, and when the notification execution lottery is won, the transition combination type notification is executed. The CPU 91a determines that the notification winning flag is not set when any one of the replays (2) to (4) and the one (1) to (3) is won in the initial gaming state, that is, the initial state. If the winning combination of the latest big bonus and the falling combination type notification lottery is not won, the notification winning flag is set, but if the notification execution lottery is not won, the transition winning combination notification is executed.

  In this embodiment, when any of the replays (2) to (4) wins in the initial gaming state, the game shifts to RT (2) where an increase in medals can be expected. As described above, the replay of this embodiment is performed. (2) to (4) The left reel “Red 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol and “Black BAR” symbol cannot be stopped simultaneously and replayed during RT (1) If any of (2) to (4) wins, it is impossible to win the replays (2) to (4) that have been won if the type is not known, with a probability of 1/3 The winning replays (2) to (4) can be won and transferred to RT (2), but the winning replays (2) to (4) are missed with a probability of 2/3. Cannot be transferred to RT (2).

  In addition, if one (1) to (3) wins in the initial gaming state, an increase in medals cannot be expected and a transition to RT (1) that does not transition to RT (2) will occur. In this way, the “Red 7”, “White 7” and “Black BAR” symbols of the left reel that make up 1 (1), 1 (2) and 1 (3) are intentionally placed on the winning line. Since it cannot be stopped, the “bell” symbols on the middle reel and right reel that make up one (1), one (2), and one (3) will always stop on the winning line. In the initial game state, if one of the cards (1), (1), (2), or (1) (3) is won, if the type is not known, one (1) or 1 that was intentionally won (2) It is impossible to remove 1 (3), and 1/3 (1), 1 ( 1) (1) (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) won with a 1/3 chance, and moved to RT (1) Will end up.

  On the other hand, when the transition type notification is executed, the player can specify the type when any of the replays (2) to (4) is won, and the replays (2) to ( 4) Since it becomes possible to specify the stop operation position where the “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol and “black BAR” symbol of the left reel constituting the player can be drawn, By performing the stop operation with the aim of the replay configuration symbol, it is possible to win the replays (2) to (4) and shift to RT (2), and the player can play one (1) to (1) 3) When winning, it becomes possible to specify the type, and the “red 7” symbol, “white 7” of the left reel that constitutes one (1), one (2), and one (3) The stop operation position that does not intentionally stop the “Black BAR” symbol on the winning line. Therefore, the player can avoid the transition to RT (1) by intentionally dropping 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3). It becomes possible.

  Further, the CPU 91a indicates that when the betting number setting operation for the next game is performed after winning of any one of the replays (2) to (4) in the initial gaming state (RT (2) starts from the next game). RT (2) effect is started when the BET command is received for the first time after receiving the gaming state command shown. The RT (2) effect is an effect unique to RT (2) and ends with the end of RT (2) (reception of a gaming state command indicating the end of RT (2)).

  The RT (2) effect is a falling role winning notification for notifying that the falling role has been won when the falling role is won during RT (2) (when an internal winning flag indicating the winning of the falling role is received), It includes a fallen role type notification for notifying the type of the fallen winning combination (the type of the fallen role specified from the internal winning flag).

  The fallen role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the fallen role, and the type of the fallen role itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of fallen role, and the types of these fallen roles May be notified by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 an image suggesting the above, or may be notified by lighting a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the falling role (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the falling role and stands out from the constituent symbol of the falling role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  In addition, during the big bonus, the CPU 91a determines whether or not to execute the transition combination type notification in the initial game state after the end of the big bonus until the next bonus is won, and the falling combination described later in RT (2). A transition combination and fallen role type notification lottery that determines whether or not to perform type notification is executed. When the transition combination and fallen role type notification lottery is won, a notification winning flag is set in the RAM 91c. Then, when the winning combination is won at RT (2) after the transition (when the internal winning flag indicating the winning of the falling combination is received), it is determined whether or not the notification winning flag is set, and the notification winning flag is determined. Is set, a notification execution lottery for determining whether or not to actually execute the falling combination type notification is executed, and when the notification execution lottery is won, the falling combination type notification is executed. When the winning combination is won in RT (2), the CPU 91a does not set the notification winning flag, that is, the falling type notification lottery in the latest big bonus before the transition to the RT (2). If the winning combination is not won, the notification winning flag is set, but if the winning notification lottery is not won, the falling combination winning notification is executed.

  In this embodiment, if a falling combination wins during RT (2), RT (2) if any special combination is not won even after reaching the specified number of games from the start of RT (2). However, as described above, the “red 7” symbol of the left reel that constitutes one (1), one (2), and one (3), which is the falling role of this embodiment, The “White 7” symbol and “Black BAR” symbol cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, and the middle reel and the right that constitute one (1), one (2), and one (3) Since the “bell” symbol on the reel will always stop on the winning line, it is impossible to deliberately remove the fallen role if the fallen role is elected during RT (2) unless the type is known. It is likely that you will miss the winning combination with a probability of 2/3, but you won with a probability of 1/3.落役 is winning, if any of the bonus is also not elected, it becomes that RT (2) is completed.

  On the other hand, when the falling role type notification is executed, the player can specify the type when the falling role is elected, and one (1), one (2) that is the falling role. It becomes possible to specify a stop operation position where the “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol and “black BAR” symbol of the left reel constituting one (3) are not intentionally stopped on the pay line. Therefore, the player can avoid the end of RT (2) accompanying the winning of the falling combination by intentionally dropping the falling combination.

  Further, the CPU 91a executes a notification mode lottery for selecting any notification mode from a plurality of notification modes having different winning probabilities of the notification execution lottery when the winning combination in the big bonus and the falling combination type notification lottery is won. The winning notification mode is set in the RAM 91c. Then, when one of the replays (2) to (4) and the one (1) to (3) is won in the initial game state that has been transferred (replay (2) to (4), one (1) to (3) Notification execution lottery executed when receiving an internal winning flag indicating one of the winnings), and when the falling winning combination is won in RT (2) after the transition (internal winning indicating the winning of the falling winning combination) In the notification execution lottery executed when the flag is received), the notification mode set in the RAM 91c is referred to, and the transition combination type notification and the falling combination type notification are executed with the winning probability corresponding to the set notification mode. Whether to do it is decided.

  In the notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the replays (2) to (4) and the one (1) to (3) are won or the winning combination is notified, the transition combination type notification or the falling combination type notification is performed. The notification mode A is executed at a probability of 50%, the notification mode B is executed at a rate of 70%, the notification mode C is executed at a rate of 90%, and the notification mode D is executed at a rate of 100%. Since the probability increases in the order of the notification modes A, B, C, and D, in the initial game state, the probability that D is higher than B, C is higher than B, and C is higher than C, and RT is higher than RT. The probability of shifting to (1) is low, and in RT (2), the probability of continuing RT (2) to the specified number of games is higher in B than A, in C from B, and in D from C. That is, the advantage for the player increases in the order of A, B, C, and D.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the ratio at which the notification modes A to D are selected in the notification mode lottery is the big bonus (1) ("red 7-red 7-" Big bonus (1) depending on whether it is a big bonus transferred with a combination of “red 7” or a big bonus (2) (a big bonus transferred with a combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7”) In the notification mode lottery executed in (2), the notification modes C and D in which the notification probability is 90% or more, that is, the notification mode having a relatively high notification probability is more than the notification mode lottery executed in the big bonus (2). In the notification mode lottery selected at a high rate and executed in the big bonus (2), the notification modes A and B in which the notification probability is less than 90%, that is, the notification probability. There relatively low broadcast mode, and is selectively at a higher rate than the broadcast mode lottery executed in the big bonus (1). For this reason, the notification probability is relatively higher in the case of winning the transitional role and falling role type notification lottery with the big bonus (1) than in the case of winning the transitional role and falling role type notification lottery with the big bonus (2). The notification mode is easily selected.

  In addition, as the big bonus effect, the CPU 91a selects the effect mode selected by the player at the time of the big bonus winning among the effect modes of the BB effect modes A to C (when receiving the winning determination command indicating the big bonus winning). Execute the big bonus production. Specifically, when the big bonus is won, the BB effect modes A to C are periodically displayed in order on the liquid crystal display 51, and the betting number setting operation is performed at the timing when the desired BB effect mode is displayed (BET command is changed). The BB effect mode displayed at that time is set. Note that the BB effect mode is not limited to this, and the player can select the effect type selected before the big bonus is won, that is, the player can select the BB effect mode by selecting the effect type. Or, the player may be able to select the BB effect mode by operating the selection switch 55 or the decision switch 56.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the CPU 91a executes the transition role and fallen role type notification lottery with different triggers depending on the BB effect mode, and the winning probability at that time also differs depending on the BB effect mode. The probability is applied, and further, the notice that the winning combination and the falling combination type notification lottery is won is also made according to the BB effect mode.

  Specifically, when the BB effect mode A is selected, when the bell wins during the big bonus (when the winning determination command indicating the bell winning is received), the transition combination and falling combination type notification lottery is executed. In that case, the winning probability is about 7.7%. Also, if the winning combination and fallen role type notification lottery is won, after the winning game, the transitional role and the falling role type with a probability of ½ of when winning the bell (when receiving the winning determination command indicating the bell winning) Announcing that you have won the notification lottery, and if you are not notified by the end of the big bonus, at the end of the big bonus (when you receive a game state command indicating the end of the big bonus), in the transition role and fallen role type lottery Announce that you have won.

  When the BB effect mode B is selected, when the bell is not won during the big bonus, that is, when a role other than the bell is won, or when the player loses (the winning of the role other than the bell, When the internal winning flag is received), the transition combination and falling combination type notification lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is 100%. In addition, when the winning combination and the falling role type notification lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination and the falling role type notification lottery has been won immediately is notified.

  When the BB effect mode C is selected, when the bell wins during the big bonus (when the internal winning flag indicating the winning of the bell is received), the first stop reel is left, middle, or right The first stop reel determined in advance at random with an equal probability and the reel that the player stopped first (the stop reel indicated by the reel stop command received first after receiving the reel rotation start command) When the two match, the transition combination and fallen combination type notification lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is about 23.2%. In addition, when winning the transitional role and falling role type notification lottery, when the big bonus ends (when a game state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received), the transitional role and falling role type notification lottery is won. Announce that.

  Note that, regardless of the BB production modes A to C, the actual probability of winning the transition role and fallen role type notification lottery in each game in the big bonus (BB production mode A: Bell winning probability (winning probability) × transition) Winning probability of winning combination and falling role type announcement, BB production mode B: Winning probability of roles other than Bell + Loss probability, BB production mode C: Winning probability of Bell / 3) is almost the same probability (about 7.2%) It becomes.

  Further, the CPU 91a, when the number of remaining games of RT (2) (the number of games until reaching the specified number of games and the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes 3 games, A period of time until the end of RT (2) is always executed continuously over 3 games and the remaining number of games in RT (2) (the number of remaining games in RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes 6 games. , Cherry (1) (1), (2), 1 (3) winning a prize at the same time as the bonus (Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (When receiving an internal winning command indicating winning of (3)), or that one of the bonuses is Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), or any bonus The chances derived from the conditions are derived. (If the combination of stop positions of each reel indicated by the reel stop command is a chance), a continuous effect lottery that determines whether or not to execute a continuous effect is executed, and the continuous effect lottery is won In addition, continuous production is performed over three games.

  In the continuous performance, a winning pattern for finally informing the winning of the bonus and a loss pattern for informing that the bonus has not been won are finally determined, and the CPU 91a determines the remaining RT (2). When the number of games reaches three games, if any bonus is won at that time, a continuous production based on the winning pattern is always executed, and if any bonus is not won, A continuous effect based on the loss pattern is executed.

  On the other hand, in the continuous effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 12, even when any bonus is won, the loss pattern may be determined, and when any bonus is won, it is continuous. When the loss pattern is determined in the effect lottery, the continuous effect is executed based on the loss pattern that finally notifies the loss.

  Specifically, when the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus are won in the continuous production lottery, the winning pattern is determined with a probability of 5%, and the loss pattern is determined with a probability of 20%. decide. If no bonus is won, the loss pattern is determined with a probability of 10%, and the winning pattern is not determined.

  Then, the CPU 91a determines the winning pattern by the continuous effect lottery when one of the bonuses is won, executes the continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern, and notifies the winning of the bonus, so that RT The background selection lottery for selecting the background of the display screen in the effect is performed, and the background of the display screen in the RT effect is changed to the background selected in the background selection lottery.

  The background of the display screen in the RT effect consists of three types, day, evening, and night, and the background of the RT effect always starts from noon. In the background selection lottery, if the big bonus (1) is won, the background is selected at the ratio of day: 50%, evening: 30%, night: 20%, and the big bonus (2) is won. If the regular bonus is selected, select the background in the ratio of noon: 70%, evening: 20%, evening: 10%, noon: 85%, evening: 10%, night : Select the background at a rate of 5%.

  In this way, in the background selection lottery, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate when the big bonus (2) is won than when the regular bonus is won, and the big bonus (2) is won. In the evening, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate. For this reason, when the background is changed to evening or night, it is possible to expect the winning of the big bonus (1) which is more advantageous for the player. On the other hand, even when the big bonus (1) is won, the day is selected for 50% and the background may not be changed. Therefore, even if the background does not change, it can be expected that the big bonus (1) will be won. It has become.

  In addition, the CPU 91a shows whether or not a bonus is won at the end of the game or at the next game when the falling role is won during the RT (2) and the RT (2) ends. The effect at the end of the fall that leads the result is executed. First, the CPU 91a determines whether or not any bonus has been won (when the game has been won) when a drop-in prize is won during RT (2) (when a winning determination command indicating a winning combination of a falling role is received). The pattern of the effect at the end of the fall is determined based on whether or not an internal winning command indicating the winning of the bonus is received. There are a winning pattern and a loss pattern as the pattern at the end of the fall, and each of the winning pattern and the loss pattern includes a pattern that is executed at the end of the game and a pattern that is executed in the next game. If one of the bonuses is won, one of the patterns is determined from the winning pattern, and if one of the bonuses is not won, one of the patterns is determined from the lost pattern. Then, according to the determined pattern, at the end of the game (when the game state command is received) or at the next game (after receiving the BET command of the next game), the fall end effect is executed, and finally the bonus Whether or not you have won is announced.

  Next, continuous production will be described.

  All the continuous effects are performed by displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the production for each individual game in the continuous production starts when the start switch 7 is operated (when the internal winning command is received), and when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (all Is finished when a reel stop command is received for the reels. There are two types of performance results for each game other than the final game: player side attacks and player side damage, and final game results are two types of player wins and losses. However, there are many types of production processes.

  As described above, the continuous effect is determined when the number of remaining games of RT (2) (the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the game state command) becomes three games, or whether or not to execute the subsequent effects. Starts when winning the continuous production lottery. In the continuous production of the winning pattern, when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in the game (final game) in which the continuous production ends (when the reel stop command is received for all the reels). The fact that the bonus is won (player win) is definitely notified.

  Further, in the continuous production of the losing pattern, it is notified that the result of the losing (losing the player) as a result of the continuous production, that is, no bonus is won. In addition, when a lost pattern is won in spite of winning any of the bonuses in the continuous production lottery, the lost is intentionally notified, but the remaining 3 of RT (2) If no bonus has been won in the game and a continuous production based on the loss pattern is started, any bonus will be won by the end of the continuous production until the end of the continuous production. If the bonus that has been won by the end does not win, the player will be informed of the contents different from the situation at the end of RT (2) if the continuous production ends and the result of the loss is informed. It will end up.

  For this reason, in the continuous production of the loss pattern started in the remaining 3 games of RT (2), at the start of the final game, it is determined whether any bonus has been won after the production has started, and the continuous production starts. If no bonus has been won after the game, the result of the loss will be notified at the end of the game, and if any bonus has been won after the start of the continuous production, the result of the final game production If the bonus is won and the bonus is won, the additional effect will be executed in the next game without replacement and the bonus will be positively announced. .

  There are a plurality of patterns in the continuous effect and the additional effect. FIGS. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a continuous effect selection table for selecting a pattern of continuous effects and additional effects. There are three types of continuous effect selection tables: a non-winning time table shown in FIG. 13 (a), a winning time table shown in FIG. 13 (b), and an additional effect table shown in FIG. 13 (c). The pattern of the continuous performance is determined by referring to the non-winning time table or the winning time table according to a random number for selecting the continuous performance pattern.

  The non-winning table shown in FIG. 13A is a table for selecting a loss pattern. In the non-winning time table, the contents of effects to be replaced in the final game when any bonus is won before the game in which the continuous effects performed in accordance with the pattern selected according to this are completed are also registered. In particular, content that is not included when there is no replacement is registered as the content of the effect that is replaced. For this reason, when one of the bonuses is won in the middle of the continuous production and the content of the production is replaced, the production in a different form from the production in the case where the content of the production is not replaced is performed.

  The winning table shown in FIG. 13B is a table for selecting a winning pattern. Regardless of which table the continuous production pattern is selected, the number of games in which the continuous production continues is three games.

  The additional effect table shown in FIG. 13C is used to select a pattern of an additional effect that is performed after the continuous effect ends when the bonus is newly won in a state where the continuous effect has already been performed. It is a table. The additional effect pattern is selected in accordance with the continuous effect pattern performed at that time. Further, the contents of the additional effects are registered that are not included in the continuous effects. For this reason, when an additional effect is performed, an effect different from the continuous effect is performed.

  In addition, the CPU 91a also wins cherries, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), which may be won at the same time as the bonus even in the initial gaming state or RT (1) ( Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) when receiving an internal winning command indicating winning (3)), or Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 ( 3), or when the chances derived on the condition that one of the bonuses is won are derived (the combination of the stop positions of the reels indicated by the reel stop command is the chance) A continuous effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect is executed, and the continuous effect is executed over three games even when the continuous effect lottery is won. In the continuous game lottery executed during the initial gaming state and RT (1), the execution of the continuous game is determined with a higher probability than the continuous game lottery executed during RT (2). In the initial game state and RT (1), the continuous performance is executed at a higher frequency than during RT (2).

  In addition, the CPU 91a is executed as the above-described single-shot effect in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), regardless of whether or not the special role is won. A chance effect is shown that indicates the possibility of winning the special role by being executed with a higher probability than when not winning the special role. The chance effect is executed when an effect pattern for chance effect is selected in an effect pattern selection process executed when an internal winning command is received. In the effect pattern selection process, an effect pattern for a chance effect is selected with a higher probability in the initial game state and RT (1) than in RT (2). During 1), chance effects are executed more frequently than during RT (2).

  Further, when the replay or special role is elected as the one-off effect during the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), the CPU 91a indicates that either the replay or special role is elected. The replay notification effect shown is executed. The replay notification effect is basically executed when the replay is won, and when the replay notification effect is executed, the replay will win, but when the special role is won, the replay will not win Therefore, when the replay notification effect is executed and the replay does not win, the special role winning is suggested. The replay notification effect is executed by selecting an effect pattern for the replay notification effect in the effect pattern selection process executed when the internal winning command is received. In the effect pattern selection process, when a replay is won during RT (2), an effect pattern for the replay notification effect is selected with a lower probability than when the replay is won during the initial gaming state and RT (1). It is supposed to be.

  Further, the CPU 91a executes a privilege grant lottery at the end of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), creates privilege acquisition information for acquiring a privilege when winning the privilege grant lottery, and converts it into a two-dimensional code. Control to display in a predetermined area of the liquid crystal display 51 (lower left of the screen, see FIG. 1) is performed.

  Then, the CPU 91a converts the privilege acquisition information created as described above into a two-dimensional code by a procedure for creating a two-dimensional code, and the converted two-dimensional code is a predetermined area of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1). In addition, it is displayed so as to be readable by a two-dimensional code reader mounted on a mobile phone or the like possessed by the player. As the two-dimensional code, a known technique (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) may be used.

  Further, the CPU 91a displays the two-dimensional code obtained by converting the privilege acquisition information on the liquid crystal display 51, and then performs a two-dimensional code display end operation (betting number setting operation) by the player or displays the two-dimensional code. After the start, the display of the two-dimensional code is ended when a display end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 91a prohibits the execution of the demonstration effect while the two-dimensional code capable of specifying the privilege acquisition information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When a waiting command is received, that is, after a certain amount of time has elapsed without the betting number being set after the game is over, even when a credit settlement operation is performed, or even when a bet settlement operation is performed, The player performs a two-dimensional code display end operation (betting number setting operation), or after the display of the two-dimensional code starts, the display end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses and the two-dimensional code is displayed. Until it is finished, the demonstration effect is not executed, and when the display of the two-dimensional code is finished, the standby command is received during the display, and after that, if the BET command is not received, It is adapted to perform a demonstration effect from the point.

  In the privilege grant lottery, different winning probabilities are applied according to the total number of big bonuses (1) and (2) on the day. Specifically, if the total number of big bonuses (1) and (2) is less than 40 and other than a multiple of 5, a winning probability of 1/50 is applied, and the total number of big bonuses (1) and (2) is 5 times, 10 times, 15 times, 20 times, 25 times, 30 times, 35 times, 1/10, 1/8, 1/6, 1/5, 1/4, 1/3, When a winning probability of 1/2 is applied and the total number of big bonuses (1) and (2) is 40 times or more, a winning probability of 1 / 1.5 is always applied.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the total number of big bonuses (1) and (2) is less than 40, the bonus grant lottery is performed at a higher rate when the number of times is a multiple of 5 than when the number of times is other than that. Even if it is a multiple of 5, the higher the number of times, the higher the number of bonuses will be won than when the number is less, and if it is 40 times or more, 39 times The bonus granting lottery is won at a higher rate than when the number is less than. That is, in the bonus grant lottery, the winning probability varies according to the history of the big bonus.

  The privilege acquisition information for acquiring the privilege includes a URL for accessing the privilege granting server and a character string required when the privilege is acquired, and is created according to the procedure shown in FIG.

  In the following, the procedure for creating the privilege acquisition information will be described. When the bonus grant lottery is won, the CPU 91a acquires the current date and time (year / month / day / hour / minute / second) (creation date) from the clock device 97. The value of the R register of the CPU 91a that randomly changes within a predetermined range is acquired, and the game history at that time stored in the game history storage area of the RAM 91c (number of big bonus (1) / big bonus (2) (Number of times / number of regular bonuses / number of games between bonuses / total number of games / number of differences).

  Then, a privilege extraction parameter used when extracting a privilege to be provided by a privilege grant server to be described later by adding a model ID unique to the model of the slot machine to the acquired creation date, R register value, and game history. create.

  Next, the privilege extraction parameter is encrypted with the same common key as that stored in the privilege granting server, and the character string obtained by encrypting the privilege extraction parameter is URL of the privilege granting server. The privilege acquisition information is created by adding the parameter as a parameter.

  Next, a usage example of privilege acquisition information will be described.

  When the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with a two-dimensional code reader mounted on a mobile phone or the like possessed by the player, the privilege acquisition information as text data, that is, the URL of the privilege grant server A character string obtained by encrypting the benefit extraction parameter as a parameter is converted into a character string added as a URL parameter and acquired. If the mobile phone possessed by the player has a function of connecting to the Internet, it becomes possible to directly access the privilege grant server based on the converted privilege acquisition information. The access to the privilege grant server is not limited to a mobile phone equipped with a two-dimensional code reader, and can be accessed from other terminals that can be connected to the Internet using the read privilege acquisition information.

  In the privilege grant server, a content database in which content granted as a privilege to a player is stored, a privilege grant history table that stores privilege acquisition information used for granting a privilege in the past, a model ID, and creation And an extraction program for extracting content to be provided based on the game date and time, and when the privilege grant server receives access based on the privilege acquisition information, it is added to the URL of the privilege acquisition information The parameters are combined with the above-described common key, and the privilege extraction parameters are acquired from the privilege acquisition information.

  The privilege extraction parameters include the model ID, creation date / time, R register value, and game history, and the privilege granting server includes the model ID, creation date / time, R register value, game included in the privilege extraction parameter. When the history is compared with the history of privilege acquisition information stored in the privilege grant history table, and there is a history of privilege acquisition information that matches all of the model ID, creation date and time, R register value, and game history Then, it is determined that a privilege has already been granted, and a reply that the privilege acquisition information cannot be used is returned. Also, if there is no history of privilege acquisition information that matches all of the model ID, creation date, R register value, and game history, based on the model ID, creation date, game history included in the privilege extraction parameter, The content that matches the extraction condition is extracted, and the extracted content is returned. Thereby, the player who accessed based on privilege acquisition information can acquire the content which the privilege provision server extracted as a privilege. When a plurality of contents that match the extraction conditions are extracted, a reply is sent to prompt the user to select one of the extracted contents, and the contents selected based on this are transmitted. It has become.

  The extraction program installed in the privilege granting server includes a model ID, a plurality of periods predetermined for each model ID (for example, one month after installation, one month to three months after installation, three months after installation, etc. ), The content extraction conditions are set for each game, and the extraction conditions corresponding to the game history (for example, less than 10 big bonuses, 10 times or more, the difference number is less than the predetermined value, the predetermined value or more, the total number of games) Is less than the prescribed number, more than the prescribed number, the number of games between bonuses is less than the prescribed number, more than the prescribed number, etc.), and the period including the model ID included in the benefit extraction parameter and the creation date of the benefit extraction parameter The content having the same condition as the game history of the privilege extraction parameter is extracted. Moreover, the operator of these privilege provision servers can change extraction conditions arbitrarily.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs the transition role and fallen role type notification lottery, the notification execution lottery, the notification mode lottery, the continuous production lottery, the background selection lottery, the production pattern selection process, and the privilege grant lottery. Random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used. That is, lottery is performed using random numbers acquired from the same random number counter for a plurality of types of lottery, and there is no need to provide a random number counter for each of these types of lottery. In the present embodiment, lottery is performed using random numbers acquired from the same random number counter for all these lotteries, but random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used for all lotteries. Even if it is not used, the above effect can be obtained if random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used for at least a plurality of types of lottery.

  Further, the CPU 91a performs control to always turn on the reel LED 55 from the reception of the reel rotation start command to the reception of the reel stop command for all the reels. This is to increase the visibility of the reel by turning on the reel LED 55 and irradiating the reel from the back at least during the fluctuation of the reel.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a betting number settlement operation when a certain amount of time (30 seconds) has elapsed without a betting number setting operation being performed after the game ends, and a credit settlement operation is performed. When it comes to send a wait command.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 continuously outputs the game sound effect by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, when the standby command is received, the game effect being output at the normal volume (MAX). Control to mute the sound (silence control) is performed.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), in the state in which the game sound effects are continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, the game is not operated after the game is finished for a certain time (30 seconds). ) Elapses, control (silence control) is performed to lower the game sound effect being output at the normal volume (MAX).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by a continuous effect or a bonus effect, even before a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ended. When a credit settlement operation is performed, control (mute control) is performed to reduce the game sound effect being output at the normal volume (MAX) without waiting for a certain period of time.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured not to transmit a standby command regardless of the time that has elapsed since the end of the game in the state where the number of bets is set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by continuous effects and bonus effects, the number of bets before a certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Is set, the game sound effects are not muted even after a certain period of time has elapsed after the game ends, and after that, the betting amount is settled and the game sound effects are Silence control is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17B, in the state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, the bet number is increased before a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Even if the set amount is set and before a certain period of time has elapsed since the game ended, when the betting amount is settled and a standby command is transmitted, the normal volume (MAX) is not waited for the certain period of time to elapse. Control to mute the game sound effect being output (silence control) is performed.

  The CPU 91a returns the game sound effect to the normal sound volume (MAX) when the bet number is set after the mute control is performed, that is, when the BET command is received after receiving the standby command. Yes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 91a displays the menu screen in a state where the bet number is set, that is, in a state where the bet command is not received after receiving the BET command. In the state where the number of bets has already been set and the player is willing to start the game, a menu screen for viewing the game history and changing the production mode is displayed. It is supposed not to be broken.

  In addition, in a state where the bet number has already been set, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 91a performs the demo if the bet amount has already been set and the player is willing to start the game even if a certain time has passed since the game ended. There is no directing.

  Further, in a state where the bet number has already been set, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game. Even when the sound effects are continuously output, the CPU 91a is in a state where the player is willing to start the game as shown in FIG. 18, so that the control for muting the game sound effects is not performed. It has become.

  Next, the display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the display control circuit 92 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and a graphic controller 1200 that performs drawing control and display control of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with a control instruction from the CPU 91a. Stream (compressed series of moving image data, each image data is also called a frame) constituting a moving image, character (image data such as a person, animal, character, figure, symbol, etc.) as image element data used as a sprite image, CG CGROM 1205 as image element data storage means for storing data such as data, and SDRAM (Synchronous DRAM) 1210 as image data storage means used as a VRAM (video RAM) area.

  The graphic controller 1200 is a system register 1202 for storing various settings of the graphic controller 1200, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, character drawing order, number of colors, enlargement / reduction ratio, palette number) , An attribute register 1203 that stores coordinates), a drawing control unit 1206 that performs drawing control of an image in a drawing area to be described later in the VRAM area, and palette data (when the drawing control unit 1206 draws an image) Data in which the display color of the character is defined) is temporarily stored in the palette buffer 1207, and the CG data buffer 1208 is temporarily stored in the CGROM 1205 when the drawing control unit 1206 draws an image. C stored A data transfer control unit 1211 that performs control to transfer data to the VRAM area, a compressed moving picture decoder 1212 that expands a stream stored in the CGROM 1205 to the VRAM area, and image data stored in a display area to be described later of the VRAM area are displayed. The video signal (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) signal and the display control unit 1213 for outputting the synchronization signal and the video signal output from the display control unit 1213 are converted into analog signals and liquid crystal This is an integrated circuit on which a DA converter 1214 to be output to the display 51 is mounted.

  The liquid crystal display 51 also has a liquid crystal drive circuit 1215 that receives an analog signal output from the graphic controller 1200 and drives a liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal drive circuit 1215 does not drive all the liquid crystal elements (no voltage is applied) in a state where no video signal (analog signal) is output from the graphic controller 1200. The display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 is in a transmissive state.

  The graphic controller 1200 includes a system bus and a CG bus. The system bus and the CG bus are connected to the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 via the CPU interface 1201, and the CG bus is a CG bus interface. It is connected to the CGROM 1205 via 1204. A system register 1202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 1203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the CPU 91a can access the system register 1202 and the attribute register 1203.

  In addition, the drawing control unit 1206, the data transfer control unit 1211, the compressed video decoder 1212, and the display control unit 1213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 1202 can be accessed. In addition, the drawing control unit 1206, the data transfer control unit 1211, and the compressed video decoder 1212 are connected to a CG bus so that the CGROM 1205 and the attribute register 1203 can be accessed.

  Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the graphic controller 1200, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 1210 via the VRAM bus interface 1209. A drawing control unit 1206, a data transfer control unit 1211, a compressed video decoder 1212, and a display control unit 1213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 1210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

  The system register 1202 includes a system control register for storing instructions such as initialization, drawing, data transfer, and execution of compressed video data decoding, an interrupt control register for storing an interrupt signal output instruction, which will be described later, and a VRAM area. A drawing register for storing a drawing area, an arrangement area for palette data, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display area in a VRAM area, and the like The storage address of the stream to be expanded, the type of the stream to be expanded, the arrangement area of the expansion buffer in which the stream is expanded in the VRAM area, the arrangement position of the DC nest that is the template used when the stream is expanded, the frame currently being expanded and all Indicates that frame expansion is complete Such decoding register for storing the status, etc. is allocated.

  The CPU interface 1201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the CPU 91a at the start of each V blank (an image update period, which is 33.3 ms in this embodiment), and sets the interrupt control register. Accordingly, the CPU 91a displays a drawing end interrupt signal indicating that at the end of drawing, a reading end interrupt signal indicating that when reading of the attribute is completed, and a transfer end interrupt signal indicating that when the data transfer ends. Respectively.

  The drawing control unit 1206, the data transfer control unit 1211, the compressed video decoder 1212, and the display control unit 1213 execute initialization of each device when an initial setting instruction is stored in the system control register. Then, when an instruction to output initialization completion signals for all devices is issued, the CPU interface 1201 outputs an initialization completion signal indicating that initialization has been completed to the CPU 91a.

  The drawing control unit 1206 reads the attribute stored in the attribute register 1203 when an instruction for reading the attribute is stored in the system control register, and instructs the output of the reading end interrupt signal when the attribute reading is completed. .

  Further, when a drawing execution instruction is stored in the system control register, the drawing control unit 1206 displays a character deployed in the VRAM area and a frame expanded from the stream in accordance with the attribute read from the attribute register 1203. A drawing process for drawing in the drawing area designated in step (1) is performed, and when drawing is completed, an output of a drawing end interrupt signal is commanded.

  When the data transfer execution instruction is stored in the system control register, the data transfer control unit 1211 transfers the character and palette data stored in the CGROM 1205 specified in the data transfer register to the specified position in the VRAM area. The data transfer process is performed, and when the data transfer is completed, an instruction to output a transfer end interrupt signal is issued.

  When a decoding execution instruction is stored in the system control register, the compressed moving image decoder 1212 performs a decompression process for decompressing the stream designated by the decode register in the VRAM area, and the decompression of each frame constituting the stream is completed. The status of the decode register is updated every time, and when the expansion of all the frames is completed, the completion of the expansion of all the frames is set in the status of the decode register.

  The display control unit 1213 performs display processing for outputting image data of the display area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the present embodiment, the display area and the drawing area are alternately switched every V blank. For this reason, the area assigned as the drawing area in a certain V blank is drawn, and in the next V blank, the display area is switched, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM area of the SDRAM 1210.

  The VRAM area includes a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a display area in which image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored, a frame memory in which characters and the like are drawn by a drawing process, or a drawing area as a frame area, Characters that are frequently used at the time of activation are read from the CGROM 1205 and stored in a dedicated character buffer L1 that is always stored in an address area assigned according to the character, and characters required according to the use situation are read from the CGROM 1205 and stored. Each area such as a general-purpose character buffer L2 serving as a temporary storage area and an error character buffer L3 in which a character to be passed to the error occurrence screen or the above-described promotion notification screen is read from the CGROM 1205 and stored. It has been.

  In particular, the palette area, the dedicated character buffer L1, and the error character buffer L3 are fixedly allocated, and no other data is allocated to the area, and these buffers are fixedly allocated. Characters that are present are not placed in other areas. In addition, the display area and the drawing area are areas of the same size, and are alternately switched and assigned, and the image data of the other area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 while being drawn in one area. It will be. For this reason, the drawing process in the drawing area and the display process in the display area can be executed in parallel, and the number of characters that can be drawn in one line is not limited. Furthermore, the frame rate (ratio at which the display is updated in a certain period) can be changed during the reproduction of the moving image. Note that the two areas allocated as the display area and the drawing area are also fixedly allocated, and no other data is arranged in these areas. In addition to these areas, characters and the like serving as moving image source data are arranged.

  As described above, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can access the system register 1202 and the attribute register 1203 via the CPU interface 1201, and according to the process data that defines the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 described above. The graphic controller 1200 is indirectly controlled by storing execution instructions and necessary data in the system register 1202 and the attribute register 1203.

  In the process data, the setting contents that the CPU 91a performs for the system register 1202 and the attribute register 1203 are defined for each V blank. The setting contents of the system register 1202 include drawing, data transfer, and decode execution instructions, and CG data, palette data, and attribute settings for data transfer. The setting contents of the attribute register 1203 are attributes, that is, parameters used when drawing a character.

  In the process data, an attribute is set so that the image is updated every V blank. For this reason, the image is updated every V blank.

  Next, drawing control will be described.

  In order for the drawing control unit 1206 to perform drawing processing, it is necessary to arrange characters developed for drawing and frames developed from the stream in the VRAM area. Of these, the frames expanded from the stream are stored in the expansion buffer by the compressed video decoder, and therefore, the frame stored in the expansion buffer indicated by the drawing pointer may be used. It is necessary to place the character as source data in the VRAM area.

  For this reason, when performing the moving image reproduction, the CPU 91a issues a transfer command from the CGROM 1205 to the VRAM area for all the characters necessary for the moving image reproduction. As a result, the data transfer control unit 1211 places all the characters necessary for moving image reproduction in the VRAM area. When playing back a movie, the same character is often used repeatedly for drawing, but the data stored in the CGROM 1205 is compressed and takes time to read it. By arranging all necessary characters in the VRAM area at the initial stage of moving image reproduction, the time required for drawing can be reduced compared to reading data from the CGROM 1205 for each frame. Note that this is not the case for frequently used characters that have been transferred to the dedicated character buffer L1 in advance at the time of activation. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 91a performs moving image reproduction, a transfer command for all characters necessary for the moving image reproduction from the CGROM 1205 to the VRAM area is performed. However, transfer of characters necessary for drawing is performed. The command may be executed each time.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 91a has a shape and size corresponding to the transmission area 51b in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 at the time of startup, and when the liquid crystal display 51 displays the transmission color (white in this embodiment). The transfer command from the CGROM 1205 of the frequently used character including the transparent area character to the dedicated character buffer L1 in the VRAM area is issued. As a result, the data transfer control unit 1211 places frequently used characters in the dedicated character buffer L1 in the VRAM area. For this reason, for a frequently used character, it takes less time to draw compared to reading data from the CGROM 1205 for each moving image reproduction.

  In order for the drawing control unit 1206 to perform drawing processing, an attribute must be set in the attribute register 1203. Since the attribute is different for each V blank, the attribute according to the process data is stored in the attribute register 1203 for each V blank.

  Then, after starting the moving image reproduction, the CPU 91a sets an attribute in the attribute register 1203 for each V blank, and then instructs execution of reading of the attribute. Along with this, the drawing control unit 1206 reads the attribute of the attribute register 1203, and instructs the output of the reading end interrupt signal when the reading ends. In response to this, the CPU 91a commands execution of drawing, and the drawing control unit 1206 draws image data in the drawing area in accordance with the read attribute.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state where necessary characters are arranged in the VRAM area, and FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing state of characters and the like on the drawing area by the drawing control unit 1206.

  Here, the control situation in the case of drawing using characters A to C will be described based on FIGS. 21 and 22. In the following, image data such as characters A to C used for drawing is also referred to as an object.

  When the drawing control unit 1206 receives a drawing execution command in a state where the characters A to C and the transparent area characters necessary for drawing are arranged in the VRAM area, the drawing control unit 1206 starts drawing in the drawing area as shown in FIG. To do.

  The order in which the objects arranged in these VRAM areas are drawn is determined by the attributes read from the attribute register 1203. The attribute has a higher priority for an object (an object closest to the viewpoint in the Z-axis direction of the 3D space) that is displayed on the near side as viewed from the viewer as the order in which the objects are drawn. In 1206, drawing is performed in order from the object with the highest priority. Here, the order of drawing in the order of the transparent area object and the characters A, B, and C is defined in the attribute. In the present embodiment, the CPU 91a sets the attribute so that the transparent area object is always drawn with the highest priority during the change of the reel. For this reason, while the reel is changing, the transparent area object is always drawn before other objects, and the transparent area object is always drawn closer to the viewer than the other objects. It has become.

  First, the drawing control unit 1206 draws a transmissive area character in an area corresponding to the transmissive area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 in the drawing area of the VRAM area as shown in FIG.

  Next, the character A having the next highest priority in the drawing order set in the attribute is drawn in the area designated by the attribute. At this time, drawing is not performed for an already drawn object, that is, a region that overlaps the transparent region object in the region where the character A is drawn. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an object has already been drawn for each pixel of the drawing area in the area where the character A is drawn, and the pixel corresponding to the character A is drawn for pixels where no object is drawn. However, drawing is not performed for pixels on which the object has already been drawn.

  When the drawing of the character A is completed, the character B having the next highest priority is drawn in the area designated by the attribute. The same applies to the character B. Of the areas to be drawn, the area that overlaps the already drawn object is not drawn. Similarly, the character C is drawn, and when the drawing of the object with the lowest priority is finished, an instruction to output a drawing end interrupt signal is issued. Note that, for an object placed outside the drawing area such as the character C, pixels in the area that protrudes in the same manner as the area that overlaps the already drawn object are not drawn and are included in the drawing area. Draw only for pixels.

  In this way, the drawing control unit 1206 draws in order from the foremost object set by the attribute in the drawing area. At this time, the drawing is not performed for the area where the object is already arranged. That is, drawing is not performed for pixels that do not require drawing.

  Further, during the change of the reel, the transparent color (white) transparent area object is drawn in the area corresponding to the transparent area 51 b of the liquid crystal display 51 with the highest priority (most front side as viewed from the viewer). Therefore, during the reel change, the transparent color (white) transparent area object is always drawn first in the area corresponding to the transparent area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and the VRAM In the display area set as the area, drawing of other objects is not performed in the area corresponding to the transmissive area 51b where the image is not always displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51.

  In this embodiment, the drawing control unit 1206 draws in order from the foremost object set by the attribute in the drawing area, and does not draw the area where the object is already arranged. However, referring to the attribute for each pixel in the drawing area, the object located in the foreground is determined from among the objects located in the corresponding pixel, and determined to be located in the foreground. The drawn object may be drawn. Even in this case, the transparent color (white) transparent area object is given the highest priority (viewed by the viewer) in the area corresponding to the transparent area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 during the fluctuation of the reel. By setting an attribute set to be drawn (most on the front side), a transparent color (white) transparent area object is always drawn on the pixel corresponding to the transparent area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, Other objects are not drawn.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when performing a continuous effect (including an additional effect), a bonus effect, a final effect, a demonstration effect, a menu screen (including a history browsing screen, an effect type selection screen), etc. Characters required for moving image reproduction accompanying the production are transferred to the general character buffer L2 in the VRAM area, but for the capacity of the general character buffer L2, for example, a character necessary for continuous production and a demonstration production. Necessary characters or characters necessary for displaying a menu screen (including a history browsing screen and a production type selection screen) cannot be simultaneously transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2. For this reason, when a new moving image is reproduced, the character for new moving image reproduction is overwritten on the character for moving image reproduction that has been performed so far, which is stored in the general-purpose character buffer L2. It is like that.

  However, if a demonstration effect is performed or a menu screen is displayed during execution of a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect, the character in the general-purpose character buffer L2 used for the continuous effect (including the additional effect) or the bonus effect is demonstrated. When a character is used to display an effect or a menu screen (including a history viewing screen or an effect type selection screen), and when returning from a demonstration effect or menu screen to a continuous effect (including additional effects) or a bonus effect Needs to read from the CGROM 1205 again a character used for a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect, and transfer it to the general-purpose character buffer L2. For this reason, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), during the execution of continuous effects (including additional effects) and bonus effects, execution of demonstration effects and display of a menu screen (history browsing, effect type) Change) is prohibited, and the demonstration screen is displayed during continuous performance (including additional performance) and bonus performance, and the menu screen is displayed for browsing history and selecting the type of performance. As a result, for the demonstration effect and the display of the menu screen, the overhead of reading out the characters of the continuous effect (including the additional effect) and the bonus effect from the CGROM 1205 and writing them in the general character buffer L2 of the VRAM is generated. Can be eliminated.

  Also, in this embodiment, the display of the menu screen is prohibited especially during execution of continuous effects (including additional effects) and bonus effects, so the effect type during execution of continuous effects (including additional effects) and bonus effects Even if the continuous effect or bonus effect character developed in the general-purpose character buffer L2 of the VRAM is not overwritten with the display of the menu screen, the continuous effect or bonus effect is executed. As the effect mode is changed, the characters of the continuous effect and the bonus effect corresponding to the changed effect mode are read from the CGROM 1205, and the read characters are expanded in the general character buffer L2 of the VRAM. Based on the character of the continuous production or bonus production, that is, the production mode before the change That the overhead of overridden for continued production and bonuses rendition of character occurs it can be eliminated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the execution of the demonstration effect and the display of the menu screen are prohibited even when the finalized effect is executed and the finalized screen is displayed. The demonstration screen is executed during the execution of the screen, or the menu screen is displayed for browsing the history and selecting the performance type, so that the characters constituting the confirmation screen are displayed as CGROM 1205 for the demonstration performance and the menu screen display. It is possible to eliminate the redundant overhead of reading from and writing to the general character buffer L2 of the VRAM.

  In this embodiment, when the error notification screen is displayed, a character required for moving image reproduction accompanying the error notification screen is transferred to the error character buffer L3 allocated separately from the general-purpose character buffer L2. . Therefore, even when an error notification screen is displayed during execution of a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect, and the character is restored to the original effect screen when the error is resolved, the character in the general-purpose character buffer L2 is displayed. In order to display the error notification screen without being overwritten, it is possible to eliminate the overhead of reading the continuous effect and bonus effect characters from the CGROM 1205 and rewriting them in the VRAM general-purpose character buffer L2. it can.

  Also, in this embodiment, while the final effect is being executed, the execution of the demo effect and the display of the menu screen are prohibited, and the demonstration is performed in a state where the winning of the bonus is notified by the final effect. The confirmation screen does not disappear when the production is executed or the menu screen is displayed.

  In addition, an effect result indicating that the bonus is won is obtained, and after the game is finished (after receiving the game state command), the demonstration effect can be executed even while waiting for the final effect by receiving the BET command. Display of the menu screen is prohibited, and the demonstration effect is executed before the final effect is executed even though the effect result indicating the winning of the bonus has already been notified. The production result does not disappear.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should have been set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal also in cases other than 5A (H) stored sometimes, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 25, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked, and it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error (Sb3), indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error. In the case of an error code, after initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed. To do.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM error or an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 has been detected (Sb5). If the operation of the setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6), and if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormal error and the abnormal winning error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, so that the error processing is canceled. The error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated in the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error or an abnormal winning error.

  Returning to FIG. 24, when it is determined in the step Sa9 that the data for failure diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the unsaved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), the set value The value stored in the workpiece (0 at this time) is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 26, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 26, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the set value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting change process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c, and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, the interruption interruption process (main) is not performed even if the interruption occurs. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process (main), and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the CPU 41a is restarted, the game cannot be restarted even if the CPU 41a is restarted, except when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. Further, in the game end process, an RT process for performing control related to RT is also performed.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a prescribed number that is a predetermined number of medals inserted in accordance with the game state of the game is read (Se1), and the process proceeds to Step Se2. The prescribed number is 3 in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In the step of Se2, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals, that is, the value of the BET counter is the specified number read in the step of Se1, and if the inserted number of medals is the specified number, the process proceeds to the step of Se3. If the input number is not the specified number, the process proceeds to Step Se4.

  In the step of Se3, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the set value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to Step Se5, and if not, the process proceeds to Step Se4.

  In the step of Se4, since it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, an error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the step of Se5, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to the step of Se6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Se6, the state number (any one of 0 to 4) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Se7. In the step of Se7, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the hand number to be drawn first is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Se8. In the step of Se7, when the state number is 0 to 2, that is, when no special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), the first combination number to be drawn Is set to 0 (big bonus (1)) and the state number is 3 to 5, that is, if any special role is carried over in the initial gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2) First, 11 (replay) is set as the role number targeted for lottery, and when the state number is 6, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 15 (watermelon) is set as the role number targeted for lottery first.

  In the step of Se8, it is confirmed whether or not the lot number to be drawn is 21, that is, whether or not all the lots to be drawn are finished, and if it is 21, that is, all the lots to be drawn. If the lottery of the combination is finished, the process proceeds to Step Se9. If not 21, the process proceeds to step Se10.

  In step Se9, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Se10, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table is 1 in association with the processing target number, and if it is 1, the process proceeds to the step of Se11. Advances to step Se12.

  In step Se11, the address of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to Step Se13.

  In the step of Se12, first, the set value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the number of determination values of the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table is associated with the set number to be processed and the read set value. Read the address of the area. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to Step Se13.

  In the step of Se13, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Se11 or Se12 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is set as a new random number value. The process proceeds to the step of Se14, and the number of determination values is determined by internal lottery. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Se16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Se15.

  In step Se15, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Se8.

  In the step of Se16, it is confirmed whether or not the role number is 0-10, that is, whether it is a role number indicating a special role or a combination of roles including a special role. If the role number is 0-10, the step of Se17 If the combination number is not 0 to 10, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  In the step of Se17, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step of Se18, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step Se18, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Sf1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in step Sf1, a new wait time is set (Sf2).

  Next, the setting at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is performed to start the rotation of the reel (Sf3). Then, referring to the table index, the table creation data is specified, and the stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels based on the specified table creation data Is created for each reel that is rotating (Sf4), and setting is made when stop preparation is completed (Sf5). As a result, the stop operation can be enabled, and then the stop operation becomes effective when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the timer interruption process (main), which will be described later, during the origin passage process. It becomes.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R has been detected (Sf6). If any of the stop switches has not been detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Sf7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected outside the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected outside the medal payout period) Error) is determined (Sf8, Sf9), and any error occurs in steps Sf7 to Sf9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step Sf6.

  When it is determined that an insertion error has occurred in step Sf8, or if a payout error is determined in step Sf9, an error code indicating the input / discharge error during reel rotation is set in the register (Sf10). The process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 25 (Sf11). When the error is released, the process returns to step Sf6 again.

  If it is determined in step Sf7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Sf12), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 25 (Sf13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the step Sf3 again, and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Sf6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is acquired. Then, after setting the work corresponding to the stop reel (Sf14), it waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Sf15).

  Then, when the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops, the detection of the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel is invalidated, and then it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (Sf16). If not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sf4. If all the reels are stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning time process executed by the CPU 41a in the winning determination process of Sd4.

  In the winning process, first, by referring to the combination table stored in the ROM 41b, the game state (state number) of the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination are set (Sg1), and the process proceeds to step Sg2. .

  In the step of Sg2, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) has been won. If the big bonus (1) has been won, the process proceeds to the step of Sg3, and the big bonus (1) indicating the big bonus (1) is shown. 1) The middle flag is set in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to step Sg6.

  If the big bonus (1) has not been won in the step of Sg2, the process proceeds to the step of Sg4 to determine whether or not the big bonus (2) has been won. If the big bonus (2) has been won, Sg5 Then, the big bonus (2) medium flag indicating the middle of the big bonus (2) is set in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step Sg6.

  If the big bonus (2) is not won in step Sg4, the process proceeds to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg6, the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored), and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. Initialize (set to 0) and proceed to step Sg8.

  In step Sg8, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won. If the regular bonus is not won in step Sg8, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If the regular bonus is won in step Sg8, the process proceeds to step Sg9, the regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in progress is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored). , Go to step Sg10.

  In the step of Sg10, after initializing the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the original process. .

  31 to 33 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not RT (1) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (1) in-progress flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh1). Proceed to step Sh7. If it is during RT (1) in the step of Sh1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the RT game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c in order to store the remaining number of games of RT (1) and RT (2) (Sh2), It is determined whether the number of remaining RT games is 0, that is, whether the value of the RT game number counter is 0 (Sh3). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in the step of Sh3, the process proceeds to the step of Sh4. If the number of remaining RT games is 0, the RT (1) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the game An RT end flag indicating that RT has ended is set in the RAM 41c (Sh6), and the process proceeds to step Sh7.

  In the step of Sh4, it is determined whether any of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus is won, and the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus is determined. If any special part of the bonus is won, the RT (1) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, the RT end flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh7), and the process proceeds to the Sh8 step. If no bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus has been won, the process proceeds to step Sh5.

  In the step of Sh5, it is determined whether any of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus is won, and the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus is determined. If any of the bonuses has been won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh8, and if any of the bonuses of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus has not been won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh6. .

  In the step of Sh6, it is determined whether any one of the replays (2), replays (3), or replays (4) has won a prize, and the replays (2), replays (3), or replays (4) )), The RT (1) in-progress flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, the RT end flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh7), the process proceeds to the step of Sh8, and the replay ( If any of the replays 2), replay (3), and replay (4) has not won, the process proceeds to step Sh8.

  In step Sh8, it is determined whether or not RT (2) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in RT (2), the flow proceeds to step Sh15. If RT (2) is in the Sh8 step, the RT game number counter value is decremented by 1 (Sh9), and it is determined whether the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, whether the RT game number counter value is 0. (Sh10). If the remaining RT game number is not 0 in the step of Sh10, the process proceeds to the step of Sh11. If the remaining RT game number is 0, the RT (2) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the RT end flag is set. Is set in the RAM 41c (Sh14), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh15.

  In the step of Sh11, it is determined whether any of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus is won, and the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus is determined. If any special part of the bonus is won, the RT (2) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, the RT end flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh14), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh15. If the bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus has not been won, either the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus is won. It is determined whether or not (Sh12).

  If any of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus is won in the step of Sh12, the process proceeds to the step of Sh15, and the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or If none of the regular bonuses has been won, it is determined whether any one (1), one (2), or one (3) has won (Sh13).

  If any one (1), one (2), or one (3) wins in the step of Sh13, the RT (2) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared and RT The end flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh14), the process proceeds to the step of Sh15, and if none of the 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), or 1 sheet (3) has been won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh15.

  In the step of Sh15, it is determined whether or not the game is in an initial gaming state, that is, a big bonus (1) medium flag, a big bonus (2) medium flag, a regular bonus medium flag, an RT (1) medium flag, an RT (2) medium flag, It is determined whether or not any of the RT end flags is set. If it is not the initial gaming state, the process proceeds to the step of Sh35, and if it is the initial gaming state, the process proceeds to the step of Sh16 and the big bonus (1 ), Whether the bonus of the big bonus (2) or the regular bonus is won (Sh16).

  If any of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus is won in the step of Sh16, the process proceeds to the step of Sh35 and the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or If none of the regular bonuses has been won, it is determined whether or not one (1) has won. If one (1) has won, 200 is set in the RT game number counter. (Sh18), the flag in RT (1) is set in the RAM 41c (Sh19), the process proceeds to the step of Sh20, and if one (1) has not won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh20.

In the step of Sh20, it is determined whether or not one (2) has won. If one (2) has won, 250 is set in the RT game number counter (Sh21), and RT ( 1) Set the middle flag (Sh22), Sh23
If one (2) has not won, the process proceeds to step Sh23.

  In the step of Sh23, it is determined whether or not one (3) has won. If one (3) has won, 300 is set in the RT game number counter (Sh24), and RT ( 1) A medium flag is set (Sh25), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh26. If one (3) has not won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh26.

  In the step of Sh26, it is determined whether or not the replay (2) has won. If the replay (2) has won, 50 is set in the RT game number counter (Sh27), and RT (2) is stored in the RAM 41c. The middle flag is set (Sh28), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh29. If the replay (2) is not won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh29.

  In step Sh29, it is determined whether or not replay (3) has won. If replay (3) has won, 100 is set in the RT game number counter (Sh30), and RT (2) is stored in the RAM 41c. The middle flag is set (Sh31), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh32. If the replay (3) is not won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh32.

  In step Sh32, it is determined whether or not replay (4) has won. If replay (4) has won, 150 is set in the RT game number counter (Sh33), and RT (2) is stored in the RAM 41c. The middle flag is set (Sh34), the process proceeds to the step of Sh35, and if the replay (4) is not won, the process proceeds to the step of Sh35.

  In the step of Sh35, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is being performed. In the step of Sh35, when the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is being performed.

  If the regular bonus is not in the Sh35 step, the process proceeds to the Sh39 step. If the regular bonus is in the step of Sh35, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1, and if a win has occurred, the value of the regular bonus medium win counter is incremented by 1 (Sh36). Is determined, that is, whether the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus winning counter is 8 (Sh37). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sh37, the process proceeds to step Sh39. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sh38). ), Go to the step of Sh39.

  In step Sh39, it is determined whether or not a big bonus is in progress. In the step of Sh39, when the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c and the BB medium signal is ON, it is determined that the big bonus is in progress.

  If the big bonus is not in the step of Sh39, the process proceeds to the step of Sh49. If the big bonus is in effect, the payout number of medals of the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter (Sh40). It is determined whether or not the value of the medium payout counter exceeds 300 sheets (Sh41). If the value of the big bonus medium payout counter does not exceed 300 in the step of Sh41, the process proceeds to step of Sh46, and if the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 300, the big bonus (2 ) It is determined whether or not the medium flag is set, that is, whether or not the big bonus is the big bonus (2) (Sh42).

  If the big bonus (2) medium flag is not set in the step of Sh42, that is, if the big bonus is the big bonus (1), whether or not the value of the further big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 465 sheets. Is determined (Sh43). If the value of the big bonus medium payout number counter does not exceed 465 in the step of Sh43, the process proceeds to step of Sh46, and if the value of the big bonus medium payout number counter exceeds 465, the big bonus (1) A big bonus (1) indicating an end game is set in the RAM 41c (Sh44), the big bonus (1) medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are cleared (Sh45), and the process proceeds to step Sh49. .

  If the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the step of Sh42, that is, if the big bonus is the big bonus (2), the big bonus (2) medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c. Is cleared (Sh45), and the process proceeds to the step of Sh49.

  In step Sh46, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sh46, the process proceeds to the step of Sh49. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sh46, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the start of the operation of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sh47), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sh48), the process proceeds to step Sh49.

  In step Sh49, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sh49, the process proceeds to step Sh53. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh50). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sh50, that is, when the regular bonus is finished and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sh52. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sh50, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sh51). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sh51, that is, when the regular bonus is restarted during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sh52, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sh51. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition for the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sh53. In step Sh52, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to step Sh53.

  In step Sh53, it is determined whether a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sh53, the process proceeds to the step of Sh56, and when the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sh53, that is, when the regular bonus starts from the next game. Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sh54), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB signal is over (Sh55). When the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to the step of Sh56.

  In step Sh56, it is determined whether the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If neither the big bonus (1) medium flag nor the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the step of Sh56, the process proceeds to the step of Sh62, and the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set. If so, it is determined whether or not the BB medium signal of the external output signals is ON (Sh57). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sh57, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sh62, and BB is being performed in the step of Sh57. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sh58), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sh59) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sh60), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sh59 elapses is performed (Sh61). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sh62.

  In the effect waiting process in the step of Sh61, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c, and the operation detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed until the effect waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter elapses. When the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected in this state, the settlement process is performed, and when the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed, the production waiting process is terminated, Return to processing.

  In step Sh62, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sh62, the process proceeds to the step of Sh65. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sh65, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON or not. Is determined (Sh63). If the RB signal is ON in the step of Sh63, that is, if the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sh65, and the RB is being processed in the step of Sh63. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sh64), and the process proceeds to Sh65.

  In step Sh65, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the BB signal is not ON in the step of Sh65, the process proceeds to step Sh83. If the BB signal is ON in the step of Sh65, the big bonus (1) flag or big bonus (2 ) It is determined whether or not the medium flag is set (Sh66). If the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the step of Sh66, that is, if the big bonus does not end, the process proceeds to the step of Sh83, and the big bonus ( 1) When neither the medium flag nor the big bonus (2) medium flag is set, that is, when the big bonus ends, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned off (Sh67), and the step of Sh68 is performed. move on.

  In the step of Sh68, after setting the effect waiting time of the ending effect in the register and enabling the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sh69), the same as Sh57 until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sh68 elapses. The production waiting process is performed (Sh70). And after completion | finish of the production waiting process in the step of Sh70, it progresses to the step of Sh71.

  In step Sh71, it is determined whether or not the automatic payment function is enabled. If the automatic payment function is not enabled, the process proceeds to step Sh73, and the automatic payment function is enabled in step Sh71. If so, the settlement process is performed (Sh72), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sh73.

  In step Sh73, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is not set to be effective in step Sh73, the process proceeds to step Sh83. If the stop function is set to be effective in step Sh73, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sh75). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sh76). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sh77), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sh78), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sh76. If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sh76, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sh77, the operation proceeds to the step of Sh80, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sh78. If it is detected, a settlement process is performed (Sh79), and the process returns to the step of Sh74.

  In the step of Sh80, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sh81), and it progresses to the step of Sh82.

  In the step of Sh82, initialization 2 for initializing a general work including the setting area of the big bonus (1) end flag in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, and then the process proceeds to the step of Sh83.

  In the step of Sh83, if the RT end flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is cleared. In the step of Sh84, the initialization process for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, and then the process at the end of the game is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is inactive during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not in operation during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is not activated. If the bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the settlement of the credit is performed. Control will be performed. In addition, even when the settlement switch 10 is activated, detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, credit settlement control is performed.

  Also, at the end of the big bonus or at the end of the big bonus, until the waiting time for the performance for performing the BB winning effect and the ending effect has passed, the transition to the next game will not proceed and the waiting time for the performance will elapse. Until the setting of the bet number is permitted, the medal lending is not permitted.

  In addition, when automatic payment is performed at the end of the big bonus, the automatic payment is completed and the setting of the bet number is permitted without shifting to the BET process of the next game until the automatic payment is completed. Until then, medals are not allowed to be lent. Furthermore, when the big bonus is ended, when the stop state is controlled, the stop state is released and the bet amount is not changed until the next game is released. Until the setting is allowed, medals are not allowed to be lent.

  FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process and the game process at intervals of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Si1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Si2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Si3). In the step of Si3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referred to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Si4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process is executed to output the phase signal data changed in the Si8 motor step process described later and the phase signal data changed in the Si23 final stop process described later (Si5).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Si6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel start processing (Si7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Si8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby processing (Si9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Si2 is restored (Si20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Si21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Si6, LED dynamic display processing (Si10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing (Si11) for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs, etc. to the output port ), Random number update processing (Si12) for updating various software random numbers, time counter update processing (Si13) for updating various time counters, and command transmission processing for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 ( Si14) After sequentially executing the external output signal update process (Si15) for updating the external output signal, the register saved in the stack area in Si2 is restored (Si20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Si1 step are permitted. (Si21), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Si4, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for branching whether it is 3, ie, timer interrupt 4 (Si16), and timer interrupt If it is not 4, i.e., timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Si17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origins of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference position Pass) and detect the occurrence of a reel rotation error, check if the stop preparation is complete, and if the stop preparation is complete and if it is rotating at a constant speed, it corresponds to the rotating reel. Whether or not these various switches satisfy the detection conditions based on the detection signal of the various switches and the process at the time of passing through the origin (Si18) for performing the processing for enabling the operation of the stop switch to be performed After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Si19) for determining, the register saved in the stack area in Si2 is restored (Si20), the interrupt prohibited in the Si1 step is permitted (Si21), and the pre-interrupt Return to processing.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Si16, when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. The number of steps until the stop calculated in the switch process (Si22) and the stop switch process is counted. When it is time to stop, the stop process (Si23) starts the brake by the two-phase excitation, and the brake is started in the stop process. After executing a final stop process (Si24) for three-phase excitation after a certain period of time, the registers saved in the stack area in Si2 are restored (Si20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Si1 step are permitted ( Si21), returning to the process before interruption.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control content of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle and right, it is determined whether or not a stop operation position has been set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, whether or not a stop operation has been detected ( If a stop operation has not been detected for all reels (Si101, Si102), the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If any stop operation of the reel is detected in the step of Si101, the process proceeds to the step of Si103, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred to, and the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. From the region number including the step number of the stop operation position, the region number to be the stop position is specified, and the process proceeds to the step of Si104.

  In the step of Si 104, the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the step of Si 103 is calculated, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. It returns to the flowchart of 35.

  FIG. 37 shows a power interruption interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 2, that is, when a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is inputted, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the power interruption interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sj1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing (main). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sj2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sj3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sj2 is restored (Sj4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sj1 is permitted (Sj5), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sj3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sj6), and all output ports are initialized (Sj7). Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sj8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sj9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sj10, where Sj10 is the same process as Sj3), the process enters a loop process in which no process is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub-control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) illustrated in FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the sub-control unit 91 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 91a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 91a malfunctions or the display control circuit 92 is activated. This is a process that is performed at the time of restart due to a malfunction.

  In the startup process (sub), the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sk1), and the initialization instruction is set in the system control register to initialize the graphic controller 1200. (Sk2), the system waits for an initialization completion signal from the graphic controller 1200 (Sk3).

  After the initialization completion signal is input in the step of Sk3, a transfer instruction of the frequently used CG data including the transparent area object to the VRAM area is set in the system control register, so that the frequently used CG data After the transfer is instructed (Sk4), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal from the graphic controller 1200 (Sk5).

  After the transfer end interrupt signal is input in step Sk5, access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sk6). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sk7), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sk8).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sk8, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step Sk9. The production state before power interruption is restored. In the step of Sk9, after setting the last control pattern executed before power interruption, only the command reception interrupt process is permitted (Sk10), and the process proceeds to the step of Sk11.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sk8, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal, so the RAM 91c is initialized (Sk18), the demo pattern is set as the control pattern (Sk19), and the command reception interrupt Only the processing is permitted (Sk10), and the process proceeds to Step Sk11.

  In the step of Sk11, it is determined whether or not the restart flag is set in the RAM 91c, that is, whether or not the restart is due to the malfunction of the display control circuit 92. If the restart flag is set, the step of Sk16 is performed. If the restart flag is not set, that is, if the start-up is associated with power-on, the process proceeds to step Sk12.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received. If the initialization command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Sk13, in which it is determined whether a power-on command has been received. If the initialization command is received, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sk20), the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sk21), and the process proceeds to Step S16.

  If the power-on command is not received in step Sk13, the process returns to the step Sk12 again. If the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step Sk14.

  In the step of Sk14, based on the power-on command received in the step of Sk13, it is determined whether or not a special role is elected in the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected in the state before the power interruption After setting the special role notification pattern for notifying the winning of the special role as a control pattern (Sk15), according to the set control pattern, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. An effect control process for controlling various effect devices is executed (Sk16), all interruptions are permitted (Sk17), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  In the step of Sk14, when the special role is not won in the state before the power interruption, the liquid crystal display 51, according to the control pattern set in the step of Sk9, that is, the control pattern set before the power interruption. An effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 is executed (Sk16), all interruptions are permitted (Sk17), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control content of the display control confirmation process executed by the CPU 91a in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the display control confirmation process, first, 1 is added to the value of the V blank waiting time counter allocated to the RAM 91c in order to measure the time since the previous V blank interrupt signal was input (Sy1). Based on the value of the V blank wait counter, whether or not the elapsed time since the last input of the V blank interrupt signal has exceeded the allowable time (time when it is highly likely that the graphic controller 1200 is hung up) (Sy2), and if the elapsed time from the input of the previous V blank interrupt signal exceeds the allowable time, a restart flag indicating restart due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92 is set in the RAM 91c. (Sy12) and jump to the head of the power interruption interrupt process (sub) described later.

  If the elapsed time since the previous V blank interrupt signal was input does not exceed the allowable time in the Sy2 step, it is determined whether or not it is in a transfer end waiting state accompanying a CG data transfer command (Sy3) If not, the process proceeds to Sy6 step.

  If the transfer end is awaited in the step of Sy3, 1 is added to the value of the transfer end waiting time counter allocated to the RAM 91c in order to measure the time since the CG data transfer was instructed (Sy4). Then, based on the value of the transfer end wait counter after the addition, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time after the execution of the CG data transfer instruction has exceeded the allowable time (Sy5), and the CG data transfer instruction is executed. If the elapsed time has exceeded the allowable time, a restart flag indicating restart due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92 is set in the RAM 91c (Sy12), and a power interruption interrupt process (sub) described later is performed. Jump to the beginning of.

  If the elapsed time from the execution of the CG data transfer instruction does not exceed the allowable time in the Sy5 step, the process proceeds to the Sy6 step.

  In the step of Sy6, it is determined whether or not it is in the state of waiting for the end of reading accompanying the attribute reading instruction. If not waiting for the end of reading, the process proceeds to step of Sy9.

  If it is waiting for the end of reading in the step of Sy6, 1 is added to the value of the reading end waiting time counter allocated to the RAM 91c in order to measure the time since the attribute reading was instructed (Sy7). Based on the value of the subsequent read completion waiting counter, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the execution of the attribute read instruction has exceeded the allowable time (Sy8), and the progress since the execution of the attribute read instruction If the time exceeds the allowable time, a restart flag indicating restart due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92 is set in the RAM 91c (Sy12), and jumps to the head of the power interruption processing (sub) described later. To do.

  In the Sy8 step, when the elapsed time after executing the attribute read command does not exceed the allowable time, the process proceeds to the Sy9 step.

  In step Sy9, it is determined whether or not the drawing end waiting state associated with the drawing command is in effect, and if not the drawing end waiting state, the display control confirmation processing is ended.

  If it is waiting for the drawing end in the step of Sy9, 1 is added to the value of the drawing end waiting time counter allocated to the RAM 91c in order to measure the time after the drawing is commanded (Sy10). Based on the value of the drawing end wait counter, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time after executing the drawing command exceeds the allowable time (Sy11), and the elapsed time after executing the drawing command exceeds the allowable time If so, a restart flag indicating restart due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92 is set in the RAM 91c (Sy12), and the process jumps to the head of the power interruption processing (sub) described later.

  If the elapsed time from the execution of the attribute read command does not exceed the allowable time in step Sy11, the display control confirmation process is terminated.

  As described above, when the V blank interrupt signal is not input beyond the allowable time, the CPU 91a instructs the graphic controller 1200 and then inputs an interrupt signal indicating the end of the processing by the command exceeding the allowable time. If not, a restart flag indicating restart due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92 is set in the RAM 91c, and the jump to the head of the power interruption processing (sub) is performed.

  FIG. 40 shows the case where the graphic controller 1200 is instructed when the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is input, and when the V blank interrupt signal is not input after the allowable time is exceeded. The flowchart which shows the control content of the electric interruption interruption process (sub) performed when the interruption signal which shows completion | finish of a process is not input exceeding allowable time, ie, when there is a high possibility that the graphic controller 1200 is hung up. It is.

  In the power interruption interruption process (sub), first, interruption is prohibited (Sz1). That is, other interrupt processes are prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt process (sub). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sz2).

  Next, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sz3), and all output ports are initialized (Sz4). Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sz5), and access to the RAM 41c is prohibited (Sz6).

  Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Further, when the power interruption interrupt process is performed due to a malfunction of the graphic controller 1200 instead of the power interruption, a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 after a certain time has elapsed, and the CPU 91a is restarted. Become.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to connect the driving tool by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. And the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are restricted from being released from each other. The connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500a, the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a, and the connection between the board side connector 622g and the cable side connector 612g. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Further, by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, it is difficult to release the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, the cable side connector 611d of the cable 600d. And the board side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, the board side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable side connector 612p of the cable 601p, the cable side connector 613p of the cable 601p and the board side of the production control board 90 The connection with the connector 623p is restricted from releasing the connection between these connectors. The connection between the board-side connector 620d and the cable-side connector 610d is restricted by the connector restricting member 500b, the connection between the cable-side connector 611d and the board-side connector 621d, and the connection between the board-side connector 622d and the cable-side connector 612d. Connection and connection between the cable-side connector 613p and the board-side connector 623p are restricted by a connector restricting member (not shown).

  These connector restricting members are configured to be able to restrict the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connectors connected to each other, and the connection release restricting state that makes the release impossible unless the release restricting part related to the connection with the connector is destroyed. As long as it is configured to leave a trace when the connection release restriction state is released, its form is arbitrary and can be variously changed.

  Specifically, for example, it may be a cover body that is formed separately from the board-side connector and the cable-side connector and that can be attached and removed in a connected state to restrict the connector from being removed. Alternatively, it may be a locking portion that is provided on at least one of the board-side connector and the cable-side connector and that cannot be detached from each other when the connectors are connected to each other, or the board-side connector is mounted. In a restricting portion or the like that is provided in a substrate storage case or the like that can store a substrate to be connected, and that forms a connection release restriction state that restricts connector removal when the substrate is stored in the substrate storage case and sealed. It may be an adhesive or the like that bonds the connectors connected to each other.

  Next, the detailed structure of the board case 200 for housing the game control board 40 and the connector restricting members 500a and 500b will be described.

  41 and 42 are exploded perspective views showing the substrate case 200 and the attachment base 250 for attaching the substrate case 200 to the housing 1b which forms the main body of the slot machine 1 and the connector restricting members 500a and 500b. FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the board case 200 is assembled to the mounting base 250, and FIG. 45 (a) is an AA cross-sectional view of FIG. 44, FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are BB cross-sectional views of FIG. 44, and FIG. FIG. 47A is a perspective view showing a state where the connector cover is attached to the attachment side member 510, and FIG. 47A is a sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. Is a D-D sectional view of FIG. 46.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the board case 200 includes a lower case 201 as a case main body that covers the back side of the game control board 40, and an upper case 203 that covers the mounting surface side of the game control board 40. And assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. The mounting surface of the game control board 40 is connected to electronic elements such as a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, and RAM 41c, and a cable-side connector provided at one end of a cable from another board, although not shown in detail. Many board-side connectors 620a to 620d are mounted.

  The lower case 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is opened by a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate.

  The two short side walls 201c of the lower case 201 are provided with two sealing pieces 211 and 211 protruding outward, and the other short side wall 201d has two pairs of locking portions. 210 protrudes outward. Further, locking pieces 511 of attachment side members 510 and 510 to be described later engage with both long side ends from the side wall 201c and both long side ends from the side wall 201d on the back surface of the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201. Engaging grooves 212 are respectively formed.

  The upper case 203 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the lower surface is open, the center of the upper surface bulges out, and convex portions 203a and 203b are formed on both short sides. It is shaped like a box. The lower surface of the upper case 203 has the same shape as the lower case 201, and a space for accommodating the game control board 40 is formed inside by assembling the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 together.

  On the side wall 203c on one short side of the upper case 203, sealing pieces 231 and 231 are disposed outwardly at locations corresponding to the sealing pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side wall 201c on one short side of the lower case 201, respectively. The four sealing pieces 232 are provided to protrude outwardly at equal intervals between the sealing pieces 231 and 231. The other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203 is engaged with the pair of locking portions 210 at locations corresponding to the two pairs of locking portions 210 provided on the other short side wall of the lower case 201, respectively. Engaging engaging portions 230 are provided. Further, on the other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203, a locking piece 235 that engages with locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250, which will be described later, at a position outward from the engaging portion 230. 235 is provided.

  In addition, recesses 203e and 203f are formed in the step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides of the upper case 203, respectively, and a game housed in the substrate case 200 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 203e of the step portion 203a. An insertion hole 234b through which the board-side connector 620d can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620d of the control board 40, and the game control accommodated in the board case 200 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the stepped part 203b. An insertion hole 234a through which the board-side connector 620a can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the board 40.

  The mounting base 250 is a member for fixing the substrate case 200 to the housing 1 b that forms the main body of the slot machine 1. The mounting base 250 is made of synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the bottom plate 250 a formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the bottom plate 201 a of the lower case 201, and two of the peripheral edges of the upper plate The side walls 250b and 250c formed on the long edges are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is open. Screw holes 252 are formed at a plurality of locations on the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250, and a side wall 250d having a notch 250e at the center is formed on one short side of the bottom plate 250a. Are provided with a pair of guides 254, 254 from the notch 250e of the side wall 250d toward the center. Guide grooves 254a and 254a into which engaging portions 257 and 257 formed at both ends of a fixing member 255 described later are fitted are formed on the opposing surfaces of the guides 254 and 254, respectively.

  The fixing member 255 is made of a synthetic resin, and drooping pieces 255b and 255b extending downward (rearward in the figure) from both ends of the fixing piece 255a having four fixing holes 256 formed on the upper surface, and the drooping piece 255b. The engaging portions 257 and 257 are formed in a substantially U-shape formed in the left and right direction (up and down direction in the drawing) from both ends of the 255b. The fixing member 255 is attached to the attachment base 250 by fitting the locking portions 257 and 257 into the guide grooves 254a and 254a formed in the guides 254 and 254 of the attachment base 250, respectively.

  On the short side of the mounting base 250 on which the side wall 250d is formed, a locking column 253 having an inward locking claw 253a at the tip is provided upright from the bottom plate 250a, and on the opposite short side. Engagement holes 251 and 251 in which engagement holes 251 a and 251 a into which the engagement parts 230 of the upper case 203 are inserted are connected to the bottom plate 250 a are provided upright at both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the connector regulating member 500a is attached to the board case 200, and the cable side attached to the board side connector 620a and attached to the board side connector 510. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the connector 610a, and the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, and the connector cover 520 is attached to the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a. Removal is regulated. The connector restricting member 500b has substantially the same configuration as the connector restricting member 500a, and is attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the attachment side member 510, and connected to the board side connector 620d. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the cable-side connector 610d. The cable-side connector from the board-side connector 620d is attached by attaching the attachment-side member 510 to the board case 200 and attaching the connector cover 520. The removal of 610d is restricted.

  The attachment-side member 510 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed into a shape that conforms to the surface shape of the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200, as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the short side where the engaging portion 230 of the upper case 203 is provided, and the shape thereof is the step portion 203b in the upper case 203 when attached to the board case 200. A cylindrical locking hole portion 513 having a notch 512 for releasing the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d) and a locking hole 513a on the inner side thereof, in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f (the concave portion 203e of the stepped portion 203a). Upper pieces 510c and 510c that contact upper surfaces of both end portions of the step portion 203b (step portion 203a) in the upper case 203 are extended through standing pieces 510b and 510b that rise from both ends of the base piece 510a formed with The locking portions 257 and 257 extend inward via the side pieces 510d and 510d depending from both ends of the upper pieces 510c and 510c. When mounting on the substrate case 200, the opposing surfaces of the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c, 510c of the attachment side member 510 to the substrate case 200 are the upper surfaces of the step portion 203b (step portion 203a) in the upper case 203. And the bottom surface of the recess 203f (the recess 203e).

  As shown in FIG. 44, a locking groove 514 is provided on the inner surface of the locking hole 513 in the locking hole 513 at a position facing the center from the lower end of the locking hole 513a. Yes. The locking groove 514 has a substantially L shape including a shallow groove portion 514a having a shallow depth from the lower end of the locking hole 513a and a deep groove portion 514b deeper than the shallow groove portion 514a, and the shallow groove portion 514a of the opposing locking grooves 514 and 514. 514a and deep groove portions 514b and 514b are formed at positions facing each other across the center. That is, the locking grooves 514 and 514 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center.

  The connector cover 520 is made of a transparent synthetic resin. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board side connector 620a (board side connector 620d). ) Is connected to the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) and is formed in a substantially U-shaped covering section 521, and one side surface 521a of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the covering section 521 is formed. A locking cylinder 522 having substantially the same diameter as the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 in the attachment side member 510 is provided via the connection piece 522a.

  The lower end of one side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 contacts the upper surface of the base piece 510a when attached to the attachment-side member 510, and ribs 521b and 521b are provided on the back surface of the side surface 521a. The lower surface of 521b is also in contact with the upper surface of the base piece 510a.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the locking cylinder 522 has an outward locking claw 523a formed at the tip at a position facing the center, and engagement portions 523 and 523 that are elastically deformable inward. It has been. The engaging portions 523 and 523 are attached with the engaging claws 523a and 523a in a state where the connector cover 520 is connected to the board side connector 620a (board side connector 620d) and the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d). When attached to the side member 510, it is provided at a position to engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed in the locking hole 513a.

  Next, the state of attachment of the connector restriction members 500a and 500b to the board case 200 and the state of attachment of the board case 200 to the housing will be described.

  First, the game control board 40 is accommodated in the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the board case 200 to be in a sealed state. In order to seal the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the engaging portions 230 of the corresponding upper case 203 are engaged with the two pairs of locking portions 210 of the lower case 201, respectively, One of the sealing pieces 211 of the case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw.

  As is well known, a one-way screw can be screwed by rotation in one direction, but cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. It is a screw. For this reason, when one sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw, either the sealing piece 211 or the sealing piece 231 is broken. Without this, these sticking cannot be released.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231, the longitudinal movement of the upper case 203 with respect to the lower case 201 is restricted, and as a result, the upper case 203 is engaged with the locking portion 210 of the lower case 201. The release of the engagement of the joint portion 230 is also restricted, and the upper case 201 and the lower case 203 are integrated with the game control board 40 accommodated therein, and the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231 are broken. Otherwise, it will not be possible to open.

  Next, the attachment side members 510 and 510 constituting the connector restricting members 500a and 500b are attached to the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is sealed. The attachment-side member 510 is elastically deformed on both side pieces 510d and 510d outward and attached to the step 203b (step 203a) of the upper case 203. Then, by releasing the elastic deformation, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 are attached by engaging with the engaging grooves 212 and 212 on the back surface of the lower case 201. At this time, the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c and 510c of the attachment-side member 510 are in contact with the upper surface of the step 203b (step 203a) and the bottom of the recess 203f (depression 203e) of the upper case 203, respectively. The notch 512 provided in the upper case 203 coincides with the insertion hole 234a (insertion hole 234b provided in the recess 203e) provided in the recess 203f of the upper case 203, and these notch 512 and insertion hole 234a (insertion hole 234b). The board-side connector 620a (board-side connector 620d) of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 is exposed from the inside of the board case 200 to the outside.

  Next, the mounting screw 259 is screwed into the housing side wall through the screw hole 252 of the mounting base 250 to fix the mounting base 250 to the housing, and the locking portions 257 and 257 of the fixing member 255 are fixed. The fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250 by fitting into the guide grooves 254 a and 254 a of the mounting base 250.

  Next, the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is assembled to the attachment base 250. Specifically, after inserting the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 into the locking holes 251a and 251a of the locking hole portions 251 and 251 of the mounting base 250, respectively, as shown in FIG. The substrate case 200 is accommodated between the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250, and the upper surface of the other end side step portion 203a of the substrate case 200 is locked by the locking claw 253a of the locking column 253, thereby fixing the substrate case 200. Temporarily fix to the mounting base 250. In this state, the four sealing pieces 232 provided at one end of the upper case 203 and the fixing holes 256 of the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 are in corresponding positions, and in this state, any of the sealing pieces The sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255 are fixed by screwing the aforementioned one-way screw into the corresponding fixing hole 256 from above the H.232.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255, the movement of the end of the substrate case 200 on the sealing piece 232 side in the removal direction from the mounting base 250 is restricted, and the locking post 253 Since the horizontal movement of the substrate case 200 toward the sealing piece 232 side is also restricted, the engagement pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end of the substrate case 200 cannot be removed from the engagement holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. It becomes possible. Further, in this state, the screw holes 252 of the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250 are all covered with the substrate case 200, and access to the mounting screws 259 is impossible, and the mounting base 250 cannot be removed from the housing. Become. In this way, the substrate case 200 to which the attachment-side member 510 is attached is fixed to the housing via the attachment base 250, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing unless the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 is broken. It will be in the state which cannot be removed from.

  When the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be removed, as shown in FIG. 47A, the side piece 510d of the attachment side member 510 is provided. 510d abuts against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b, 250c of the mounting base 250 and is held between them so that deformation of the both side pieces 510d, 510d of the mounting side member 510 outward is restricted. It becomes impossible to remove from 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43, with respect to the board side connectors 620a and 620b of the game control board 40 exposed through the insertion holes 234a and 234b of the board case 200 and the notches 512 of the base piece 510a in the attachment side member 510. After connecting the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, respectively, the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a, and the board side connector 620d and the cable side connector 610d are connected. As shown in FIG. 5, the cover portion 521 of the connector cover 520 covers the upper side of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d, and the engagement tube 522 of the connector cover 520 is engaged with the engagement hole portion 513 in the attachment side member 510. Fits into the hole 513a Make. As a result, the engaging portions 523 and 523 of the locking cylinder 522 abut against the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a and elastically deform inward. At this time, when the engaging portions 523 and 523 are positioned so as to cover the cable-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 610d with the covering portion 521, the engaging portions 523 and 523 are naturally formed in the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the inner surface of the locking hole 513a. Positioning in the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a, the locking cylinder 522 is further fitted, and the locking claws 523a, 523a at the tips of the engagement portions 523, 523 are in the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a of the locking grooves 514, 514. By reaching, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the inward elastic deformation of the engaging portions 523 and 523 is released, and the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, respectively. The upward movement of the locking cylinder 522 is restricted, and the side surface 521a of the covering portion 521, the side surface of the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a, the base The side surfaces of the side connector 620d and the cable side connector 610d come into contact with each other and the rotation of the locking cylinder 522 with respect to the locking hole 513 is restricted, so that the mounting side member 510 and the connector cover 520 are connected and integrated. The connector restricting member 500a thus formed is formed. In this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are covered with the locking hole portion 513, it is impossible to elastically deform the engaging portions 523 and 523 inward from the outside, and the connector cover 520 or the attachment side member Unless 510 is broken, the connector cover 520 cannot be removed from the attachment side member 510.

  Further, when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 so as not to be detached, as shown in FIGS. And the movement of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d in the pulling direction from the board side connector 620d is restricted, and the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a of the cable side connector 610d The removal from the side connector 620d is regulated.

  In this way, with the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing, and then the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d are connected to the board side connector 620a and the board side connector 620d. In this state, the board-side connector 620a and the board-side connector 620d are attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to partially cover the board-side connector 620d from above. The board-side connector 620d cannot be removed.

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a and the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are released will be described.

  To release the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a and the connection between the cable-side connector 610d and the board-side connector 620d, the attachment-side member 510 or the connector cover 520 is broken and the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member. 510, or the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 of the board case 200 is broken, and the board case 200 is detached from the mounting base 250, and the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 attached is removed. It is necessary to remove from 200.

  For example, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a or the cable-side connector 610d from the board-side connector 620a or the board-side connector 620d due to a failure of the cables 600a, 600d, etc., it is removed by the former method, When replacing the entire case 200, the latter method may be removed.

  First, when replacing the cable 600a (cable 600d), when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) from the board-side connector 620a, the connector constituting the connector regulating member 500a (connector regulating member 500b) The method of removing the cover 520 from the attachment-side member 510 will be described. First, the connecting piece 522a that connects the cover portion 521 of the connector cover 520 and the locking cylinder 522 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the covering portion 521 is separated and the locking cylinder 522 can be rotated with respect to the locking hole portion 513. In this state, by rotating the locking cylinder 522 counterclockwise when viewed from above, the engaging portions 523 and 523 move from the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514 to the positions of the deep groove portions 514b and 514b. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), from the state where the locking claws 523a, 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the locking claws 523a, 523a The shallow groove portions 514a and 514a are disengaged. As a result, the locking cylinder 522 can be moved upward. As shown in FIG. 45C, when the locking cylinder 522 is pulled upward, the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the deep grooves 514b and 514b. However, in this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are exposed, the engaging portions 523 and 523 can be elastically deformed inward, and the engaging claws 523a can be elastically deformed inwardly. 523a and the deep groove portions 514b and 514b are disengaged, and the locking cylinder 522 can be detached from the attachment side member 510, whereby the connector cover 520 is completely separated from the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d) by the cable is also released, the cable side connector 610a (cable side Connector 610d) and it is possible to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a (substrate side connector 620d).

  When the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment-side member 510, the covering portion 521 and the locking cylinder 522 are broken, and once broken, the original state is not restored. Therefore, the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) and the board The trace which canceled connection with the side connector 620a (board | substrate side connector 620d) will remain.

  Next, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 610d from the board-side connector 620a and the board-side connector 620d when replacing the board case 200, the attachment-side member 510 and the connector cover 520 together with the board case 200 The method of removing from the board will be described. First, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the end of the substrate case 200 on the side of the sealing piece 232 can be moved away from the mounting base 250, so that the locking claw 253 a of the locking column 253 and the stepped portion 203 e of the substrate case 200 Release the engagement. As a result, it is possible to move the sealing piece 232 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the board case 200 is detached from the attachment base 250, and the side pieces 510d and 510d of the attachment side member 510 can be deformed outwardly, without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. The attachment-side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200. With this, the attachment-side member 510 is removed from the board case 200 in a state of being integrated with the connector cover 520, whereby the cable-side connector 610a and the cable by the connector cover 520 are removed. Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the side connector 610d is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620a and the board side connector 620d can be released.

  In order to remove the attachment side member 510 from the substrate case 200 also by this method, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 needs to be broken. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a and the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are released.

  Further, according to this method, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken and remains on the fixing member 255, but the attachment side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200 without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. Therefore, by attaching the attachment side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled to the new board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated for replacement, the cable side connector 610a and the board side in the new board case 200 are attached. The connection side with the connector 620a and the release of the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are disabled, and a new fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250 and the connector cover 520 is assembled. A new board case 200 to which the member 510 is attached is attached. By attaching the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 to the base 250, the attachment side member 510 cannot be removed again, and the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a, When the connection between the side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d is released, the trace can be left. That is, in such a case, the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 can be reused.

  In this embodiment, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 of the attachment side member 510 are elastically deformed outward and engaged with the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. When the attachment side member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 and the substrate case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, the attachment side member 510 side Since the pieces 510d and 510d abut against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b and 250c of the attachment base 250 and are sandwiched, the deformation of the attachment-side members 510 on both sides 510d and 510d to the outside is restricted. For example, a part of the attachment side member is screwed on the back surface of the substrate case 200 or a removable locking pin. And fixing the board case 200 to the housing (mounting base) in a non-removable manner, the screws and locking pins are concealed, and the board case 200 is attached to the housing, The attachment side member may be controlled to be removed from the substrate case 200. After the attachment case is fixed to the housing with the attachment member attached to the substrate case 200, the attachment member is the substrate. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it cannot be removed from the case 200.

  Next, the detailed structure of the connector restricting member 650 will be described.

  48 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 constituting the connector restricting member 650. FIG. 49 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member 680 is assembled to the mounting table 660. 50A is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 49, and FIG. 50B is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the connector restricting member 650 includes a mounting table 660 on which the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted, and a cover member 680 that covers the mounting table 660 from above. After accommodating the operation unit relay board 110, the cable side connectors 611a and 612g of the corresponding cables 600a and 601g are connected to the board side connectors 621a and 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and then the cover member 680 is attached to the case. By attaching to the body 610, removal of the cable side connectors 611a and 612g from the board side connectors 621a and 622g is restricted.

  The mounting table 660 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a larger diameter than the operation unit relay substrate 110. As shown in FIG. 48, board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c, 622d to 622f, and 622g are mounted on the operation unit relay board 110, both side faces on the long side of the mounting table 660, and short boards. The board side connectors 622a, 622b, 622c, and 622d to 622f whose insertion holes open in the horizontal direction with respect to the mounting surface in the operation part relay board 110 when the operation part relay board 110 is placed on one side surface of the side. Each of the locking holes 661 having the locking holes 661b is provided via the connection piece 661a so as to protrude outward, avoiding the portion where the 622g is located. On the inner peripheral surface of the locking hole 661b, a pair of locking claws 661c and 661c facing the center are formed at positions facing each other across the center.

  The cover member 680 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting table 660. On one long side, the cover member 680 is located at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110. A cover portion 681 that bulges toward the front side at a position corresponding to the board-side connectors 622a and 622b of the operation portion relay board 110 on the other long side. Cover portions 689 that bulge toward the front are formed at positions corresponding to 622c, 622g, and 622d to 622f, respectively.

  On the upper surface 681a of the cover part 681, a notch 681b for releasing the cable 600a connected to the board side connector 621a, which is narrower than the long side of the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a, is formed on the outer side surface. Thereby, covering surfaces 681c and 681 are formed on both side ends of the upper surface 681a, respectively.

  The cover portion 688 has notches 682a for releasing the cables 601a and 601b connected to the board side connectors 622a and 622b, and the cover portion 689 has a cable 601c connected to the board side connector 622c. A notch 682b for releasing the cable, a notch 632c for releasing the cable 601g connected to the board side connector 622g, and a notch 682d for releasing the cables 601d to f connected to the board side connectors 622d to f are formed. Has been. In particular, the notch 682c for releasing the cable 601g connected to the board-side connector 622g is formed to be narrower than the length of the long side of the cable 601g, and both ends of the notch 682c are covered from the cover portion 689. Pieces 683 and 683 are respectively provided.

  Further, on both side surfaces on the long side and one side surface on the short side of the cover member 680, the locking holes are projected so as to protrude outward at positions corresponding to the locking holes 661 of the mounting table 660. A locking cylinder 684 having substantially the same diameter as the inner peripheral surface of 661b is provided via a connection piece 684a. Lock holes 684a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the lock cylinder 684 at locations corresponding to the pair of lock claws 661c provided on the inner periphery of the lock hole 661b. Can be combined.

  Next, the mounting state of the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 48, the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted on the mounting table 660, and the board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c. , 622d to 622f and 622g are connected to cable side connectors 611a, 612a, 612b, 612c, 612d to 612f and 612g, respectively. After connecting these cable side connectors to the board side connector, the cover member 680 is attached to the mounting table 660.

  Specifically, the locking cylinder 634 of the cover member 680 is fitted into the locking hole 661 b of the corresponding locking hole 661 of the mounting table 660. Then, by pushing the locking cylinder 634 into the locking hole 661b, the locking claw 661c in the locking hole 661b is engaged with the locking hole 684a of the locking cylinder 684. As a result, it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the locking claw 661c and the locking hole 684a from the outside. As shown in FIG. If the part 661 or the locking cylinder 634 is not broken, it is in a state where it is assembled so that it cannot be removed.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 50A, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 611a connected to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. The covering surfaces 681c and 681c of 680 are covered, the movement of the cable-side connector 611a in the pulling direction from the board-side connector 621a is restricted, and the removal of the cable-side connector 611a from the board-side connector 621a is restricted. ing.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable side connector 612g connected to the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 are attached to the cover member 680 as shown in FIG. Covered with the covering pieces 683 and 683, the movement of the cable-side connector 612g in the pulling direction from the board-side connector 622g is restricted, and the removal of the cable-side connector 612g from the board-side connector 622g is restricted. .

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g are released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, a connecting piece 684a for connecting the locking cylinder 684 of the cover member 680 with a tool such as a nipper is provided. Break. As a result, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are separated, and the cover member 680 can be removed from the mounting table 660. By removing the cover member 680 from the mounting table 660, the covering surfaces 681c, 681c The restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the unplugging direction is released, and the restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 612g in the unplugging direction by the covering pieces 683 and 683 is also released, so the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a And the connection between the cable-side connector 612g and the board-side connector 622g can be released.

  When the cover member 680 is removed from the mounting table 660, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are broken. Once the cover member 680 is broken, the original state is not obtained, and the separated locking cylinder 684 is removed from the mounting table 660. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a and the connection between the cable-side connector 612g and the board-side connector 622g are released. It will be.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, at the end of the big bonus (1) (2), a privilege grant lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, privilege acquisition information for acquiring a privilege is obtained. The identifiable two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 so as to be readable by a two-dimensional code reader mounted on a mobile phone or the like possessed by the player, and thus the benefit directly given to the slot machine 1 A privilege can be given separately.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the bonus grant lottery varies according to the history of the big bonus, and the expectation that the privilege will be granted according to the history of the big bonus is made sharp. be able to.

  Further, in this embodiment, the privilege acquisition information is created by encrypting the privilege extraction parameters used when the privilege grant server extracts the privileges, and the privilege acquisition parameters are analyzed by analyzing the privilege extraction parameters. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being illegally acquired from the privilege grant server.

  Since slot machines are generally installed in a state where bi-directional communication with other slot machines and computers cannot be performed, a unique ID cannot be assigned to each privilege acquisition information. There is a possibility that the same privilege acquisition information may be created in the slot machine, and it is difficult to give a privilege exclusively to one privilege acquisition information. In this embodiment, the privilege acquisition information is configured. In addition to the model ID and creation date and time, the privilege extraction parameters include the value of the R register that randomly varies within a certain range, so it is not possible to assign a unique ID to each privilege acquisition information. It is very unlikely that the value of the R register will be the same at the same date and time on the model, and this model ID, creation date and time, and the value of the R register may be combined. The privilege acquisition information can be substantially individually identified by each other, so that a privilege is exclusively given to one privilege acquisition information, that is, the same privilege acquisition information is used for multiple access. Even if it exists, it can prevent that a privilege will be provided redundantly with respect to one privilege acquisition information.

  In this embodiment, the value of the R register is used as a value that fluctuates randomly within a certain range. However, if the value fluctuates randomly within a certain range, other values such as hard random numbers and soft random numbers are used. May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, information (model ID, creation date and time, R register value) for identifying each privilege acquisition information is included in the parameter for privilege extraction, and is added to the URL in an encrypted state. Therefore, it is very difficult to tamper with these pieces of information, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as tampering with information for identifying each of the privilege acquisition information to obtain the same privilege in duplicate.

  In addition, once the slot machine is installed, the program of the main control unit and the sub control unit cannot be changed afterwards, and if only the result of the privilege grant lottery is applied as the privilege acquisition information, it is based on the privilege acquisition information. Since the content and number of benefits that can be provided depend on the result of the privilege grant lottery, the content and number of benefits cannot be expanded further. Since the gaming history that can be various combinations at that time is included in the bonus extraction parameters that constitute the bonus acquisition information, not the bonus granting result itself, even after the slot machine is installed, the bonus granting server side , The content and number of benefits can be expanded up to the combination of game histories, and different benefits are granted depending on the number of differences and the difference in bonus probability Etc., it is possible to have a difference in the contents of the privilege to be granted in accordance with the game history.

  Furthermore, since the creation date and time are included in the benefit extraction parameters, it is possible to give different privileges depending on the period for which the benefit acquisition information was created, even if the installation period becomes longer than expected, etc. The benefits that can be obtained according to the period can be changed, and even if the benefits that can be obtained in the meantime are changed without receiving the benefits, the benefits can be obtained with the actual creation date and time. It becomes possible to grant the privilege based on.

  In this embodiment, (the number of big bonus (1) / number of big bonus (2) / number of regular bonus / number of games between bonuses / total number of games / number of differences) is applied as the game history. Other game histories, for example, the number of winning or winning of a specific small role, the number of winning or winning of a specific small role between bonuses, the number of differences in a specific period such as between bonuses, etc. may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, after the two-dimensional code obtained by converting the privilege acquisition information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the player performs a two-dimensional code display end operation (betting number setting operation) or the two-dimensional code. When the display end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses after the start of display, the display of the two-dimensional code ends, and the player's will even before the display end time elapses Thus, the display of the two-dimensional code can be terminated. By displaying the two-dimensional code for a longer time than necessary, it is possible to prevent others from reading the two-dimensional code.

  In addition, while the two-dimensional code that can specify the privilege acquisition information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, execution of the demonstration effect is prohibited. During this time, if a standby command is received, that is, a game 2D code display end operation by the player even when a certain amount of time has passed without the bet being set, the credit is adjusted, or the bet is adjusted The demonstration effect is executed until the display end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses after the start of the display of the two-dimensional code after the (betting number setting operation) is performed or until the display end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses. The time for the player to read the two-dimensional code can be ensured, and the player can reliably read the two-dimensional code.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable 600a. The connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g are released. The connector restricting member 500a and the connector restricting member 650 are restricted. As a result, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an illegal driving tool and connected to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 for illegal actions relating to the progress of the game. For example, it is difficult to conduct illegal actions such as inputting / outputting various signals. For example, a slot machine with a bonus won can be provided at the opening of the store by connecting a driving tool, etc. Easily available (for example, in this embodiment, when the total number of big bonuses is a multiple of 5, the probability of winning the bonus grant lottery is high, so the number of big bonuses is 1 which is a multiple of 5. Effective implementation of illegal sales such as providing a slot machine at the time of opening a store where it is easy to obtain privilege acquisition information. It can be prevented.

  Further, in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200, the connection piece 522a of the connector cover 520, and the connection piece 684a of the cover member 680 are broken. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. , The illegal business can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and by doing so, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an unauthorized driving instrument, and the game control board 40 is connected. Since it becomes difficult to perform an illegal act such as causing the main control unit 41 to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game, it is possible to effectively prevent the unauthorized operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connection between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop after the reel starts rotating until the reel is stopped as in the present embodiment, it is between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines that connect the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected to the game control board 40, the operation unit relay board 110, and the like. Since the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a, that is, the release of the connection of only one connector connection is restricted. It is possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Even when a plurality of signal lines that connect the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected via a plurality of cables, the board-side connector is connected. A plurality of parts are prepared for restricting the release of these connector connections by restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board-side connectors and the plurality of cable-side connectors with a single part, as well as being arranged in close proximity. There is no need, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 and the board side connector 621a of the operation part relay board 110 is released, and the operation unit relay board 110 is connected. Since the release of the connection between the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g that connects the inserted medal sensor 31 and the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 is simultaneously restricted by one connector restriction member 650, a plurality of these There is no need to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the board side connector 620a of the game control board accommodated in the board case 200 and the cable side are attached by attaching the connector regulating member 500a including the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 to the board case 200. The connector 610 a is restricted from being removed, and in this state, the board case 200 is attached to the attachment base 250 and the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed to each other, whereby the connector restriction member 500 a is removed from the board case 200. Therefore, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken to release the fixation between the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250), or the mounting side member 510 or the connector cover 520 is mounted. If not released, the board side connector 620a to the cable side connector 61 A state that can not be pulled out of a. That is, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace that the sealing piece 232 is broken or the connection piece 522a is broken. Since it becomes impossible to do so, it becomes possible to surely detect that there is a possibility of fraud.

  Further, when the game control board 40 is replaced together with the board case 200 containing the game control board 40 due to a failure or the like, the sealing piece 232 is broken to fix the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). If released, the connector regulating member 500a can be removed from the board case 200 and the cable side connector 610a can be removed from the board side connector 620a. Therefore, the connector regulating member 500a can be destroyed or the board case 200 can be destroyed. The cable-side connector 610a can be separated from the board-side connector 620a without opening.

  Further, the connector regulating member 500a is composed of the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520, and after the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, and the board is in that state. The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a by being attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to cover a part of the cable-side connector 620a from above. Is connected to the board-side connector 620a, and then the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 of the attachment-side member 510 located around the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 52 is simply attached to the attachment side member 510. Part of the cable-side connector 610a is covered and the movement of the cable-side connector 610a in the unplugging direction is restricted, so that the assembling work is reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted. it can.

  Further, even when the game control board 40 is housed in the board case 200, it is only necessary to connect the cable side connector 610a to the board side connector 620a as it is, and then attach the connector cover 520. In this case, the assembly work can be more effectively reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted.

  Further, the connector cover 520 does not cover the entire connection portion between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a, but covers only a part of the cable-side connector 610a in the pulling direction side. Not only can the removal of the connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a be surely restricted, but the amount of material required for manufacturing the connector cover 520 can be reduced.

  Further, since the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, the structure of the connector cover 520 and the attachment side member 510 can be simplified. A plurality of stop cylinders 522 may be provided, and a locking hole 513a may be provided at a corresponding location on the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 may be attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations. By doing so, the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations across the connection portion between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a. The removal and removal of the side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated.

  In addition, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, but a rib that contacts the surface of the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510 is provided on one side wall of the connector cover 520. Since 521b and 521b are formed and the movement of the connector cover 520 is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be reliably restricted.

  Further, inwardly extending locking pieces 511 and 511 are formed at both ends extending from the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510, and the locking pieces 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. In this state, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 by being assembled to the substrate case 200 and engaging with the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. Since the regulating member 500a can be attached to the board case 200 without using other members such as screws and pins, the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, when the attachment side member 510 constituting the connector restricting member 500 a is attached to the board case 200, the opposing surfaces of the attachment side member 510 of the base piece 510 a, the upper pieces 510 c, 510 c to the board case 200 are the steps in the upper case 203. The upper surface of the portion 203b and the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f are in contact with each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized parts and the like from being attached between the connector restricting member 500a and the surface of the board case 200.

  Further, since both the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500a are made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board case 200 may be impaired by the connector restricting member 500a. Therefore, there is no problem in monitoring the game control board 40. Further, even if an unauthorized part is attached to the gap between the connector restricting member 500a and the board case 200, it can be easily found.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is elected before power interruption, the CPU 41a transmits a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and until the notification effect receives a prize determination command indicating that the special role is won. In other words, it is continuously executed until the winning special role is won.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 produces the effect even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized as will be described later. Without returning to the state, even if another command is received, the production is not controlled accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  In addition, the notice effect is continuously executed until a winning judgment command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, so that the special role is won, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the CPU 41a indicates a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected. , And the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, so that the sub-control unit 91 controls the notice display effect indicating that the special role is won, the effect effect LED 52, This is executed by a production device such as the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. The slot machine is set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool and is provided to the player at the start of the game shop operation. Do It said was an illegal business can be more reliably prevented.

  In this embodiment, the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is restricted by the connector restricting member. After the main control unit 41 is activated, the effect control board By connecting 90, it becomes difficult to craft such as not to notify the special role, so that illegal sales by an amusement store can be prevented more reliably. Further, the connector restricting member is configured to be able to restrict the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector connected to each other, and the connection release restriction that makes the release impossible unless the release restricting part related to the connection with the connector is destroyed. When the state is formed and the connection release restriction state is released, the trace remains so that the release restriction part must be destroyed in order to release the connection between the connectors. Since it is extremely difficult to form the connection release restriction state again after releasing the connection, and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively prevent the fraud.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is monitored during a power failure, and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is monitored. Is released, the game control board 40 has a disconnection monitoring IC 50 that stores a disconnection flag indicating that, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to check the disconnection flag at the time of activation. When the disconnection flag is stored based on the reply from the accompanying disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the disconnection flag is stored, that is, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is released. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game. Since all the areas except for the above area are initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, after the main control unit 41 is activated, the special control board 90 is connected so that the special role is not notified. In this case, since the RAM 41c is initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, illegal sales by the amusement store can be prevented more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 also monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 at the time of a power failure, and the electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. When the general connection state is released, the disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to confirm the disconnection flag at the time of activation, and the disconnection monitoring IC 50 receives a request for the disconnection flag. When the disconnection flag is stored based on the reply and the disconnection flag is stored, that is, when the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the disconnection abnormality occurs. Control of the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error to disable the progress of the game and the CPU 41a in the area of the RAM 41c uses it. All regions except the region in the initializing, becomes impossible return to the original state.

  On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. Unauthorized sales such as providing slot machines that are set in a state in which special roles are won using driving tools and slot machines that are set in a state where it is easy to obtain privilege acquisition information to players at the start of operations at amusement stores. It can be effectively prevented.

  Further, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 even when energized, and the electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. When the state is released, the disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a periodically checks the storage state of the disconnection flag in the timer interruption process even after the activation, and the disconnection flag is stored. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game, and all areas of the RAM 41c other than the area being used by the CPU 41a are initialized, Since it is impossible to return to the original state, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can be used even when the connection of the connector is released to replace it with a normal connector without turning off the power. The disconnection flag is stored, and accordingly, an error state due to disconnection abnormality is controlled, and all areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. It is possible to more surely prevent illegal sales such as providing slot machines set to the winning state and slot machines set to make it easy to obtain privilege acquisition information to the players at the start of operations at the amusement store. it can.

  Also, in this embodiment, once controlled to an error state due to a disconnection abnormality error, the game progresses unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The disabled state is not released. That is, not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine with the initialization of the RAM 41c, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change operation is an employee of a game shop) Therefore, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the amusement shop side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 41a determines that the disconnection is abnormal and controls the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. Although the configuration is such that the original state cannot be restored, the RAM 41c is not initialized in the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error, but after that, the RAM 41c is initialized (in this embodiment, the setting change mode is entered). A transition operation corresponds to this, but separately from this, an initialization switch for initializing the RAM 41c by being detected when the power is turned on may be provided, and the initialization operation of the RAM 41c by the initialization switch may be applied. ), The error state may be canceled and the game can be made possible. Even if you use special equipment and set a special role winning illegally, or set it to be easy to obtain privilege acquisition information, by disconnecting the connector to replace it with a regular connector, Since the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated, the initialization of the RAM 41c is performed and the progress of the game is disabled until the RAM 41c is initialized. Effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing slot machines set for special roles elected and slot machines set for easy access to bonus information to players at the start of business at amusement stores, etc. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of the connection between the connectors, but the state of electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is monitored, and the game control board When the electrical connection state between 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, a disconnection flag indicating the fact is stored, and the CPU 41a confirms the storage state of the disconnection flag at the start and after the start. If the disconnection flag is stored, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game. Initialize all the areas of the M41c area except for the areas that are being used by the CPU 41a, or disable the progress of the game until the RAM 41c is initialized by performing an initialization operation, so that the connectors can be inserted and removed. Regardless of whether or not the structure is restricted, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool, so it is possible not to have a structure that restricts the insertion and removal of connectors. In addition to requiring a significant structural change in the parts to regulate, it is possible to improve maintainability in the event of a failure.

  In this embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, but signals necessary for the progress of the game are input and output. Electronic components (for example, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. in a configuration that does not stop the reel until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of reel rotation as in this embodiment). Even if it does, the effect similar to the above is acquired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 has an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and an electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And the game control board 40 between the electronic component (the input medal sensor 31) and the game control board 40 that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When the disconnection is determined, the RAM 41c is initialized to prevent unauthorized sales by the game store. As shown in FIG. 65, the backup power source of the main control unit 41 is connected to the game control board 40. To the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110 and the inserted medal. Via the cable 601g for wiring connection of the sensor 31 and further turned back by the inserted medal sensor 31, and returned to the game control board 40 again via the cable 601g, the operation part relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and the main control part 41 The connector may be connected between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off. Is released even at one location, the backup power supply line is disconnected, the data in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 cannot be retained, and is lost. In other words, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. On the other hand, in order to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools, it is necessary to connect and disconnect connectors. However, using a driving tool, it is possible to illegally set special roles and to make it easy to obtain bonus information. However, since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection of the connector in order to replace it with a regular connector, the slot machine or privilege set in a state where the special role is won using the driving tool It is possible to prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which acquisition information is easily available to a player at the time of starting business of a game shop.

  Note that when the backup power is returned from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via the inserted medal sensor 31 and supplied to the main control unit 41, the connector connection therebetween is released. Although the data in the RAM 41c is lost, an electronic component (for example, the start switch 7 or the reel after the reel starts rotating as in the present embodiment) that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the operation is performed via stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are not configured to stop the reel until the stop operation is performed.

  Capacitors and batteries that store backup power are mounted on electronic component mounting boards and relay boards (operation unit relay board 110, etc.) for these electronic parts, which are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. A backup power supply line from a capacitor or a battery mounted on the mounting board or the relay board is connected to the game control board through a cable together with a signal line of the electronic component and supplied to the main control unit 41. Even in this case, since the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection between the mounting board or the relay board and the game control board 40 is released, the same effect as described above is obtained. In addition, the game control board 40 can be backed up via a cable from a capacitor or battery mounted on the mounting board or relay board. Therefore, in order to continue supplying the backup power to the main control unit 41 when the cable is disconnected, it is necessary to short-circuit the backup power supply line across the boards. Since it becomes very difficult to release the connector connection in a state in which the backup power supply is continuously supplied, the connection of the driving tool can be effectively prevented.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after RT (2) where an increase in medals can be expected, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is terminated. RT (2) is ended when any special combination wins, when any falling combination wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination or falling combination. After the start of RT (2), even if one of the special roles wins before reaching the specified number of games, if the selected special role does not win, RT ( If 2) does not end and the winning special role is not awarded, it will be possible to continue to control RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if he wins, he won the special role Without it, it is possible to digest the RT (2) until it reaches the specified number of games, never would cause losses feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  Further, in the initial gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to RT (2) which is advantageous for a player who can expect an increase in medals by winning replays (2) to (4). As a result of winning (3), an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility of shifting to RT (1), which is disadvantageous for a player who does not shift to RT (2). When one (1) to (3) wins in the initial gaming state, the game moves to RT (1), which is disadvantageous for the player, but when RT (1) ends, the game moves to the initial gaming state again. Become. For this reason, even if the transition to RT (1) is made without transitioning to RT (2) in the initial gaming state, the transition to the initial gaming state is then made again, so that there is a possibility of transitioning to RT (2) periodically. The initial game state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (2) can be maintained.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types (replays (2) to (4)) of roles that trigger the transition to RT (2). Since the number of medals that can be expected fluctuates, it is possible to give a sharp increase / decrease in the number of medals according to the type of combination that triggers the transition to RT (2).

  In the initial gaming state, when any of the replays (2) to (4) wins, the operation procedure that matches the winning conditions of the replays (2) to (4), that is, the replays (2) to (4) Since the player can perform a stop operation at a timing within the pull-in range of the combination, that is, the player can be shifted to RT (2) by technical intervention, the interest in the initial gaming state can be enhanced. In this case, the operation procedure that becomes the winning condition changes depending on the type of replay, and there is no winning procedure common to all types of replay, so the player guesses which type of replay is won, Whether or not to shift to RT (2) is determined depending on whether or not the game is won, and the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the initial game state, when one of the replays (2) to (4) is won, the transition combination type notification that notifies the type with the probability according to the notification mode is performed, so the transition combination type notification As a result, the player can recognize the type of replay that has been won, and as a result, can know the operation procedure that matches the winning conditions of the replay and can move to RT (2). Since the probability of shifting to RT (2) can be varied depending on whether or not the type notification is made, the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types (1 (1) to (3)) of roles that trigger the transition to RT (1), and depending on the type, the prescribed number of games of RT (1) to be subsequently shifted, that is, a game Since the number of games in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player fluctuates, the number of medals can be increased or decreased depending on the type of role that triggers the transition to RT (1).

  In the initial gaming state, even if any one of (1) to (3) is won, an operation procedure for avoiding winning of one (1) to (3), that is, one (1) to (1) 3) Since the player can stop operation at a timing outside the pull-in range of the combination of 3), that is, the initial gaming state can be continued by the player's technical intervention, the interest in the initial gaming state can be enhanced. . At this time, the operation procedure for avoiding winning changes depending on which one (1) to (3) is won, and there is a common avoidance procedure for all the one (1) to (3). Therefore, the player guesses what kind of transitional role is won, and whether or not the initial gaming state continues is determined depending on whether or not it hits, and further interest in the initial gaming state Can be increased.

  Further, in the initial gaming state, when one of the cards (1) to (3) is won, a transition combination type notification that notifies the type with a probability corresponding to the notification mode is performed. By performing the notification, the player can recognize the type of the winning one (1) to (3) and, as a result, know the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the one (1) to (3). It is possible to continue the initial gaming state, and the number of games in which the initial gaming state continues, that is, the number of games in the chance zone that can be shifted to RT (2) varies greatly depending on whether or not the transition role type notification is made. Therefore, interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even after the start of RT (2), even if the falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at an operation procedure for avoiding the winning combination of the falling combination, that is, at a timing outside the drawing range of the combination of the falling combination, and Since it is possible to continue the RT (2) by performing the stop operation so that the special roles are not arranged, that is, the technical intervention of the player, the interest associated with the RT (2) can be enhanced. At this time, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not RT (2) continues depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), which is a fallen role, can be won at the same time as a special role in RT (2), after RT (2) starts Even if one of the falling roles is won, the special role may be won at the same time, so even in this case, the player's expectation for the special role is effective. Can be increased. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since only the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), which are relatively advantageous to the player, may be won at the same time as the falling combination, either of the falling combinations is awarded. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) may be won at the same time. Even in such a case, the player's sense of expectation can be further effectively increased. .

  In addition, even if a falling role wins during RT (2), if any special role is elected, RT (2) will not end. Even if the player wins, RT (2) will continue to win the special role, which will ensure the winning of the special role.

  In addition, the winning probabilities of 1 (1) to (3), which will be RT (2) falling, are different, and during RT (1), the winning procedure of 1 (3) with the highest winning probability is stopped. By performing the operation, it is possible to increase the medal payout rate during RT (1), and during RT (2), the stop operation is performed with the avoidance procedure of one (2) and (3) with a high probability of winning. By performing the above, it is possible to increase the probability of avoiding the end of RT (2). That is, since the difference in the player's advantage depends on whether or not the player performs technical intervention, the interest can be enhanced.

  Further, in RT (2), when any type of falling combination is elected from among a plurality of types of falling combinations, a falling combination type notification is made to notify the type of the falling combination with a probability corresponding to the notification mode. Therefore, by reporting the fallen role type, the player can recognize the type of the fallen winning combination, and as a result, can know the operating procedure for avoiding the winning of the fallen role, and continue RT (2). Since the number of games continued by RT (2) can be greatly varied depending on whether or not the falling role type notification is made, the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the lottery and fallen role type notification lottery for determining whether or not the transitional role type notification or the falling role type notification is performed is performed during the big bonus, and the result is a big bonus effect that is unique during the big bonus. So that you can enhance your interest during the big bonus.

  In addition, a transition role and a falling role type notification lottery is executed at an opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode selected by the player, and the probability corresponding to the BB effect mode is also applied as the winning probability at that time. The timing of deciding whether or not to notify the transition role and fallen role type notification according to the BB effect mode selected by the player and the expectation at that timing change, so the player actively participates in the game Can raise awareness that Furthermore, since the notice of winning the transitional role and fallen role type notification lottery is also made at the opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode, the timing of the transitional role and falling role type notification lottery and its notification timing are qualified. Can be related.

  Moreover, when winning the transition combination and fallen role type notification lottery, when the replays (2) to (4) and one (1) to (3) are won in the subsequent initial game state, the transition combination type notification is issued. A notification mode lottery for selecting any notification mode from a plurality of notification modes having different probabilities of execution and a probability (notification probability) that a falling combination type notification is executed when a falling combination is won at RT (2). When the replays (2) to (4) and 1 (1) to (3) are won in the initial game state according to the notification mode won in the notification mode lottery, The probability that the type notification is executed and the probability that the fall type notification is executed when the winning combination is won at RT (2) change, and as a result, RT (2 ) And the continuation of RT (2) Since also changes the number of games that can wait, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the initial game state and RT (2).

  Also, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of special roles (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus), and the number of medals that can be expected by winning each is different. When a winning combination is won, the advantage of the value given varies depending on the type of the winning combination.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the big bonus is won, the number of medals that can be expected during the big bonus is significantly larger than the regular bonus associated with the regular bonus being won, and the end of the big bonus After that, there is a possibility that the transition combination type notification and the falling combination type notification may be executed, so that further medal acquisition can be expected.

  The big bonus includes a big bonus (1) and a big bonus (2). The big bonus (1) has a larger number of medals that can be expected during the big bonus than the big bonus (2). Since the ratio of the notification mode having a higher notification probability is selected for the big bonus (1) is higher, the big bonus (1) can be expected to acquire more medals than the big bonus (2). ing.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, depending on the type of special combination, not only the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, but also the probability that the transition combination type is notified in the initial initial gaming state, falls at RT (2). Since the probability that the combination type notification is made, that is, the number of medals that can be expected thereafter, also varies, it is possible to give a sharp increase / decrease in medals according to the type of special combination.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous production when a winning combination that is likely to be won at the same time as the bonus is won or when a chance that is highly likely to be won by the bonus is derived. The determined continuous effect lottery is executed, and when the continuous effect lottery is won, the continuous effect is executed, and finally it is notified whether the special role is won or not, and the remaining number of games in RT (2) is 3 Whether or not the game has been performed continuously for 3 games until the end of RT (2) when the game is reached, and whether or not a special role is won in the final game of RT (2) or the game after the final game In the case where the continuous effect is executed and the winning combination of the bonus is notified before the falling role is won and RT (2) is ended, at the end of the game. Or to the next game An effect at the end of the fall that leads to an effect result indicating whether or not the bonus is won is executed, and after the start of RT (2), the faller is awarded before reaching the prescribed number of games. Thus, even when RT (2) has ended and no continuous performance is made, the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2) can be effectively increased.

  Also, in this embodiment, during RT (2), when a winning combination that is likely to be won at the same time as a bonus is won, or when a chance that is highly likely to be won by a bonus is derived, it is continuously triggered A continuous production lottery that decides whether or not to produce a performance is executed, and when a continuous production lottery is won, a continuous production is executed, and an event that may have won a bonus has occurred Since the continuous performance is executed only in such a case, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus by the continuous performance.

  In the present embodiment, it is continuously triggered when a winning combination that is likely to be won at the same time as the bonus is won in RT (2), or when a chance that is highly likely to be won by the bonus is derived. There is a possibility that a bonus will be won even if no role is won and no chances are derived during RT (2). (2) Since the frequency is low, continuous production may be executed even when chances are not derived. Even in this case, the player's sense of expectation for winning the bonus by continuous production Can be effectively increased.

  Also, in this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won, a winning pattern is determined by a continuous effect lottery, a continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern is executed, and the bonus winning is notified. The background selection lottery for selecting the display screen background in the RT (2) effect is performed, and the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect is changed to the background selected in the background selection lottery. In 2), since the background of the RT (2) effect changes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus, so that the interest associated with the RT (2) effect can be effectively increased.

  In addition, in the background selection lottery, when the big bonus (2) is won, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate than when the regular bonus is won, and the big bonus (2) is won. In the evening, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate. For this reason, when the background is changed to evening or night, it is possible to expect the winning of the big bonus (1) which is more advantageous for the player. On the other hand, even when the big bonus (1) is won, the day is selected for 50% and the background may not be changed. Therefore, even if the background does not change, it can be expected that the big bonus (1) will be won. It has become.

  As described above, in the background selection lottery, the background is selected with a probability corresponding to the type of the special role won, and the type of the special role won according to the method of changing the background of the RT (2) effect is selected. Since it becomes possible to suggest, the interest accompanying RT (2) production can be improved more effectively.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning combination that is likely to be won at the same time as the bonus is won in RT (2), or when a chance that is highly likely to be won in the bonus is derived. The production mode (background) of the RT production is changed on the boundary of the continuous production, but the production mode may be changed on the basis of the changed production indicating the possibility that the production mode is changed. Even in such a case, when a role that may be won at the same time as the bonus is won in RT (2), the change effect is triggered by the chance that the chance of winning the bonus is derived. It is preferable to execute the change effect, and in this way, the change effect is executed only when an event that may have won the bonus has occurred. Expectation of that player can be effectively enhanced. Note that the same effect as described above can be obtained even if a change effect is executed when no winning combination is won.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a winning combination that is likely to be won at the same time as the bonus is won in RT (2), or when a chance that is highly likely to be won is derived. The event mode (background) of the RT effect is changed at the boundary of the continuous effect, but on the condition that the bonus is won during RT (2), the event that the possibility of winning the bonus is low Or the event alone does not indicate the possibility of winning the bonus, and the continuous effect or the change effect described above is performed to change the effect mode of the RT (2) effect, or the event is continuously triggered The effect mode of the RT (2) effect may be changed without any effect or change effect, and in this way, the bonus winning notification can be given unexpectedness.

  Also, in this embodiment, the RT (2) effect production mode changes on the condition that the bonus is won. However, when the bonus is won, the bonus is won. The effect mode of the RT (2) effect may be changed with a higher probability than when there is not, and in this way, even if the effect mode is changed, the winning of the bonus is not determined, so RT (2) You can continue your interest until the end.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous performance is executed even in the initial gaming state and RT (1), but the continuous performance is executed in the initial gaming state and RT (1) at a higher frequency than during RT (2). Thus, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the bonus in the initial gaming state that tends to be monotonous as compared to during RT (2) and in RT (1).

  Further, in this embodiment, as the above-mentioned single-shot effect in the initial game state, RT (1) and RT (2), a chance effect indicating the possibility of winning the special role is executed, and the initial game state And during RT (1), chance effects are executed at a higher frequency than during RT (2), and the initial gaming state and RT (1) that are more likely to be monotonous than during RT (2). Inside, the player's expectation for the bonus can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, a replay notification effect indicating that either a replay or a special role is won is executed as the above-mentioned one-off effect in the initial gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). At the same time, when the replay is won during RT (2), the replay notification effect is executed with a lower probability than when the replay is won during the initial gaming state and RT (1). By shifting to RT (2), even if the probability of replay increases, the frequency of replay notification effects does not become extremely high along with it, and an appropriate balance of effects can be maintained.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the transition to the big bonus, and during the big bonus, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is activated, and the regular bonus is not activated. If it is determined that the regular bonus is activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus operates in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to increase the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds the specified value (465 or 300 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. When the end condition is satisfied, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If there is no regular bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is inactive. If it is not, the regular bonus is activated. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Also, it may end when the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a prescribed number. The process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a predetermined value (465 or 300 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions. For example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (subtract the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) The number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular The Big Bonus end condition is met when the bonus ends, etc., or if any of these conditions is met, Vinegar termination conditions may be established.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is not necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before the regular bonus is activated again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific prize, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs moving image reproduction, it issues a transfer command from the CGROM 1205 to the VRAM area for all the characters necessary for the moving image reproduction. As a result, the data transfer control unit 1211 places all the characters necessary for moving image reproduction in the VRAM area. When playing back a movie, the same character is often used repeatedly for drawing, but the data stored in the CGROM 1205 is compressed and takes time to read it. By arranging all necessary characters in the VRAM area at the initial stage of moving image reproduction, it takes less time to draw than reading data from the CGROM 1205 for each frame.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 91a issues a transfer command from the CGROM 1205 of the frequently used character including the transparent area character to the dedicated character buffer L1 in the VRAM area at the time of activation. As a result, the data transfer control unit 1211 places frequently used characters in the dedicated character buffer L1 in the VRAM area. For this reason, a character that is frequently used requires less time for drawing than reading data from the CGROM 1205 every time a moving image is reproduced.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when performing a continuous effect (including an additional effect), a bonus effect, a final effect, a demonstration effect, a menu screen display, etc., it is necessary to play a video accompanying each effect for the reasons described above. Character is read from the CGROM 1205 and transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2 on the VRAM area. However, due to the capacity of the general-purpose character buffer L2, for example, a character necessary for continuous production (including additional production) The character necessary for the demonstration effect or the character necessary for displaying the menu screen cannot be simultaneously transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2. For this reason, when a new moving image is reproduced, the character for new moving image reproduction is overwritten on the character for moving image reproduction that has been performed so far, which is stored in the general-purpose character buffer L2. Thus, the overhead of reading / transferring these characters occurs. Characters used for continuous effects (including additional effects) and characters used for bonus effects have a larger amount of data than characters with a single effect because these effects are executed over a plurality of games. The overhead required for reading / transfer is larger than that of a single effect character.

  Here, even when a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect is being executed, a demo effect is executed when a game operation is not performed for a certain period of time between games. At that time, the demonstration effect character must be read from the CGROM 1205 and transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2 in the VRAM area. In this case, since the demonstration effect character must be overwritten with the continuous effect (including additional effects) characters, if the demonstration effect is ended after some game operation, the original continuous effect will be resumed. For example, a continuous effect character (including an additional effect) must be read from the CGROM 1205 and transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2. In addition to this, data indicating how far the continuous production (including additional production) has been executed at the start of the demonstration production must be saved and restored at the end of the demonstration production. The same applies when the player performs an operation to display a menu screen for viewing the game history or changing the effect type.

  In addition, in the case of a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect when a demonstration effect is executed when a game operation is not performed for a certain period of time between games even during execution of a final effect In the same manner, the demonstration effect character must be read from the CGROM 1205 and transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2 in the VRAM area. In this case, since the demonstration effect character has to be overwritten on the confirmed effect character, if the demonstration effect is ended after some game operation is performed, if the confirmed effect is to be restarted, the confirmed effect character is set to CGROM 1205. Must be read out and transferred to the general character buffer L2. The same applies when the player performs an operation to display a menu screen for viewing the game history or changing the effect type.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, execution of the demonstration effect and display of the menu screen are prohibited during execution of the continuous effect (including the additional effect), the bonus effect, or the execution of the final effect. ing. That is, since the demonstration characters and menu screens (including the history browsing screen and the production type selection screen) are not read from the CGROM 1205 and transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2, continuous execution is being performed. Characters of effects (including additional effects), bonus effects, and final effects are overwritten by characters on demo effects and menu screens (including history browsing screens and effect type selection screens) and deleted from the general-purpose character buffer L2. There is no end. Since the characters are not erased, there is no need to read out the characters of continuous effects (including additional effects), bonus effects, and final effects from the CGROM 1205 and transfer them to the general-purpose character buffer L2.

  For this reason, in order to execute a demonstration effect or a menu screen display that is not directly related to the current progress of the game, characters of continuous effects (including additional effects), bonus effects, and final effects are read from the CGROM 1205. Thus, the overhead of the process of transferring to the general character buffer L2 does not occur redundantly. In addition, there is no processing overhead of saving data indicating how long the continuous production has been executed at the start of the demonstration production or the menu screen and returning the data at the end of the demonstration production or the menu screen.

  Also, if the effect mode can be switched during the continuous effect (including the additional effect) or during the bonus effect, the corresponding character in the new effect mode is read out from the CGROM 1205 and stored in the general character buffer L2. Must be transferred. If this is allowed, the same processing must be performed many times each time the effect mode is switched.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display of the menu screen is prohibited during execution of continuous effects (including additional effects) and bonus effects, and the effect mode is not changed. Therefore, the characters of the continuous effect (including the additional effect) and the bonus effect are written in the general-purpose character buffer L2, and the continuous effect (including the additional effect) and the bonus effect corresponding to this are currently selected until the end. Characters of continuous effects (including additional effects) and bonus effects based on an effect mode different from the effect mode that is present are not written in the general character buffer L2. For this reason, when the production mode is changed during the continuous production (including additional production) and the bonus production, a character corresponding to the same situation is read from the CGROM 1205 only in the production mode, and transferred to the general character buffer L2. It is possible to prevent the overhead that must be generated.

  In this embodiment, when an error occurs during execution of a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect, the effect being executed is interrupted and an error notification screen indicating the occurrence of the error is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 is displayed so that the fact can be surely notified.

  Further, when displaying the error notification screen, the characters necessary for moving image reproduction accompanying the display of the error notification screen are transferred to the error character buffer L3 allocated separately from the general-purpose character buffer L2. . For this reason, even when the error notification screen image is displayed during the execution of the continuous effect (including the additional effect) and the bonus effect, and when the error effect is eliminated, the general character buffer L2 is displayed. In order to display an error notification screen without being overwritten, generally a character having a large amount of data such as a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect is read from the CGROM 1205 and a VRAM general-purpose character buffer is used. It is possible to eliminate the redundant overhead of rewriting to L2.

  In this embodiment, when an error notification screen is displayed, a character required for moving image reproduction accompanying the error notification screen is transferred to an error character buffer L3 allocated separately from the general-purpose character buffer L2. However, when an error notification screen is displayed during execution of a continuous effect (including an additional effect) or a bonus effect, a character necessary for moving image reproduction accompanying the transfer is transferred to the general-purpose character buffer L2 and the error is eliminated. Therefore, it is possible not to resume the continuous effect (including the additional effect) or the bonus effect, and even in this case, the character of the continuous effect (including the additional effect) or the bonus effect generally having a large amount of data. Is read from the CGROM 1205 and rewritten to the VRAM general-purpose character buffer L2. On top can be eliminated that is caused, since the VRAM separately is not necessary to provide a buffer for error for character and generic character buffer L2, can also reduce capacity required on top of VRAM management is simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display of the menu screen is prohibited in the state where the bet number is set, the bet number is already set, and the player is willing to start the game. In this state, by prohibiting the display of the menu screen, it is possible to prompt the start of the game, and the character used for displaying the menu screen, that is, the character that is not used immediately is read from the CGROM 1205 and used for the VRAM general-purpose character. Writing to the buffer L2 can be prevented.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a predetermined time has elapsed after the game ends in a state where the bet number has already been set. For this reason, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs a demonstration effect if the bet amount has already been set and the player is willing to start the game even when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ended. Thus, the start of the game can be urged, and the character used for the demonstration effect, that is, the character that is not used immediately is read from the CGROM 1205 and written to the general character buffer L2 of the VRAM. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, in a state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, when a certain time (30 seconds) elapses without the game progressing operation after the game ends, Control (silence control) is performed to lower the game sound effect that is being output at the volume (MAX), but the credit is adjusted even after a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ended. In some cases, the control for lowering the game sound effect being output at normal volume (MAX) is performed without waiting for the elapse of a certain time (silence control), and before a certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Even if a bet amount is set and a certain amount of time has elapsed since the end of the game, when the bet amount is settled and a standby command is sent, the normal volume (MAX ) Control to lower the game effect sound that is being output (silence control) is performed, and the player's willingness even before a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game Since the volume of the continuous game sound effect can be lowered by this, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In addition, in the state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, even if the predetermined time has passed after the game ends, if the bet number is set, the game sound effect is displayed. The control to mute is not performed, the player is willing to start the game, and the game sound effect is muted even though it must immediately return to the original volume There is nothing.

  Also, in this embodiment, while the final effect is being executed, the execution of the demo effect and the display of the menu screen are prohibited. The confirmation screen does not disappear when the menu screen is displayed, and the confirmation screen showing the confirmation of the bonus, that is, the content that is particularly important for the player, is continuously reported until the bonus is won. can do.

  Also, an effect result indicating that the bonus has been won is obtained, and execution of the demonstration effect or display of the menu screen is prohibited while waiting for the execution of the final effect by receiving the BET command after the end of the game. Despite the fact that the effect result indicating the winning of the bonus has already been announced, the demonstration effect is executed or the menu screen is displayed until the final effect is executed. The result does not disappear, and the result indicating the winning of the bonus, that is, the result that is particularly important for the player, is continued until the number of bets for the next game is set and the final effect is executed. Can be notified. In such a situation, the final effect is executed by setting the number of bets for the next game, the bonus is confirmed, and the demonstration effect and menu are displayed while the final effect is being executed. Since the display of the screen is prohibited, it is possible to continuously notify the winning of the bonus until the bonus is won as a result.

  In this embodiment, the demonstration effect is not executed in the state where the bet number is set. However, even if the bet number is set, the operation for proceeding with the game for a certain period of time is performed. If the game is not performed, the demonstration effect may be performed. In this way, the demonstration effect is executed when the player is left with the bet number set, and the player plays the game. It can be confirmed that it is not performed.

  In addition, an effect result indicating that the bonus is won is obtained, and after the game is finished, a BET command is received, that is, a bet number is set by inserting a medal or operating one BET switch 5 or MAXBET switch 6. However, it is only necessary that the confirmed effect is executed in response to an operation for starting the next game. For example, the number of bets that can start the game is set. When the operation is performed (when the number of medals that can start the game are inserted, when the number of bets that can start the game is set by operating the 1BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, the 1BET switch 5 or the MAXBET When the final effect is executed at the time when the switch 6 is operated) or the number of bets that can start the game is set, May be configured to perform a definite effect upon the switch 7 is operated.

  In addition, if the bonus game is a rendition result, and the end game is a replay, the bet number is set without the player performing the bet number setting operation. When the player needs a bet setting operation, the player performs the finalized effect when the bet setting operation is performed and the bet number is automatically set. When the setting operation is not required, the final effect may be executed when the start switch 7 is operated.

  Also, in this embodiment, as an example of the final effect, after starting, it is continuously informed until the winning bonus is won, but what is intermittently notified, for example, a game in which replay is won For example, when the bonuses cannot be aligned in the game, the notification may be temporarily interrupted and the notification may be resumed by being aligned, or the notification mode may be temporarily changed.

  In addition, in the case where a demonstration effect is performed even when the number of bets is set and a final effect is performed by operating the start switch 7, an effect result indicating that a bonus is won is obtained. After the game is over, it is preferable to prohibit execution of the demonstration production and display of the menu screen while waiting for the execution of the finalized production by operating the start switch 7. In spite of the fact that the effect result indicating is informed, the demonstration effect is not executed until the confirmed effect is executed, or the effect result is not erased by displaying the menu screen, The production result indicating the winning of the bonus, that is, the production result particularly important for the player, until the betting number of the next game is set and the final production is executed. It is possible to continue to broadcast.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 does not input the V blank interrupt signal from the graphic controller 1200 for a certain period, the CPU 91a completes the instruction corresponding to the instruction even though it is instructed to the graphic controller 1200. When the interrupt signal is not input for a certain period, the interruption interruption process (sub) for backing up the production state is executed, and the control state backed up in the interruption interruption process is restored by restarting. Then, with the restart of the CPU 91a, the graphic controller 1200 is initialized, and the operation of the graphic controller 1200 is resumed by executing again an instruction based on the control pattern executed before the restart to the graphic controller 1200. It is supposed to let you. Thereby, even if the graphic controller 1200 hangs up, it can be restored to the state before the hang-up. In addition, the display operation that has been halfway due to the hang-up can be resumed after recovery, and more appropriate recovery from an abnormal display state becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process (sub) executed at the time of power interruption is used as a process for restoring the control state at the time of restart, and the graphic controller 1200 is hung up. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute a dedicated process, so that it is possible to appropriately recover from an abnormal display state while preventing an increase in program capacity and a complicated process.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up, a restart flag is set in the RAM 91c before the power interruption interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the CPU 91a that is started up thereafter sets the restart flag. By determining the presence / absence, it is possible to distinguish whether the display control circuit 92 is restarted due to power-on or the display control circuit 92 is restarted. If it is determined that it is an activation, and if it is possible to return to the effect state before the restart, it is possible to return to the effect state before the restart without waiting for the reception of the initialization command or the power-on command. For this reason, although the CPU 91a is not activated by turning on the power but restarted by the hang-up of the display control circuit 92, the initialization command and the power-on command cannot be received, and the production is not performed. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 is based on the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Thus, since the CPU 41a does not need to control the effect only by transmitting a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the effects can be varied.

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the privilege acquisition information for acquiring the privilege is converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed. However, it may be displayed at least in a form that can be read by the player, and converted into a one-dimensional code. May be displayed. Furthermore, the privilege acquisition information is not limited to being displayed in a form that can be read only by a terminal such as a two-dimensional code reader, but is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a character string obtained by converting the privilege acquisition information according to a predetermined rule. However, the player may be able to read it.

  In the said Example, although URL of a privilege grant server is contained in privilege acquisition information, and it is set as the structure which accesses a privilege grant server based on privilege acquisition information and acquires a privilege, privilege acquisition information is a privilege grant server. Consists of passwords and privilege extraction parameters only, does not include a URL, accesses the specified privilege grant server, and enters these passwords and privilege extraction parameters to obtain benefits, or extracts these passwords and privilege It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which benefits can be obtained by applying parameters for use by e-mail or mail.

  In the above-described embodiment, a bonus grant lottery is performed at the end of the big bonus (1) and (2), and a bonus grant lottery is won to display a two-dimensional code that can specify bonus acquisition information. For example, when a specific bonus is over, when a bonus is won or won, when the number of bonuses reaches a specified number, when a specific bonus is won or won, a specified number of bonuses is specified. When the number of times is reached, the number of times that the bonus has been won or won continuously within the specified number of games after the bonus ends and the number of times the bonus has been won or won reaches the specified number of times (RT (2) ), The number of transitions to RT (2) again without transitioning to RT (1)) reaches the specified number of times, and when a specific small role wins or wins, a specific small role is entered Or the game that has passed since the end of the previous bonus when the number of wins reaches the specified number, when the bonus probability exceeds or falls below a certain probability, or when the difference number exceeds or falls below the specified threshold When the number reaches the specified number of games, the number of games from the end of the bonus exceeds the specified number of games when the number of times a specific small role has won or won since the end of the previous bonus reaches the specified number of bonuses When the number of games not transferred to RT (2) reaches the specified number of games after the bonus, RT (2), or after the bonus or RT (2) ends, the bonus or RT (2) When the number of games from the end exceeds the specified number of games and the bonus is won, winning or winning, or when RT (2) starts However, when the game results satisfy certain conditions, a bonus grant lottery is performed so that a two-dimensional code that can specify bonus acquisition information can be displayed by winning, or a lottery etc. It is also possible to display a two-dimensional code that can specify privilege acquisition information uniformly without performing it.

  In particular, after the bonus has ended, the number of times the bonus has been won or won within the specified number of games has reached the specified number, or the number of times that the transition has been made to RT (2) has reached the specified number When the event is relatively unlikely, or when the bonus probability falls below a certain probability, or when the difference number falls below a specified threshold, the number of games that have passed since the end of the previous bonus reaches the specified number of games. When it reaches, when the number of times that a specific small role has won or won since the end of the previous bonus reaches the specified number of times, the number of games from the end of the bonus exceeds the specified number of games, and the bonus is won, won or won When the number of games that have not shifted to RT (2) reaches the prescribed number of games after the end of bonus or RT (2), the bonus or RT ( ) When the number of games since the end of) exceeds the specified number of games and the bonus is won, winning or winning, or when RT (2) is started, or when the event is triggered by a disadvantageous event for the player It is preferable to display a two-dimensional code that can specify privilege acquisition information uniformly without performing a lottery or the like.

  In addition, for example, when the number of games reaches the first specified number of games since the bonus ends, a bonus grant lottery is performed, and a two-dimensional code that can specify bonus acquisition information by winning is displayed. When the second prescribed game number that is larger than the prescribed game number is reached, the lottery of the lottery is displayed in the first stage, such as displaying a two-dimensional code that can specify the privilege acquisition information uniformly without performing the lottery. Based on the result, a two-dimensional code capable of specifying the privilege acquisition information is displayed, and in the second stage exceeding the two-dimensional code, a two-dimensional code capable of specifying the privilege acquisition information uniformly is displayed regardless of the lottery. good.

  Further, the privilege that can be obtained by the privilege acquisition information is not limited to the data content stored in the privilege granting server, but may be an actual prize or a right (such as a lottery right) that allows the prize to be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the bonus grant lottery varies depending on the number of big bonuses, but other game histories, for example, the bonus winning probability, the number of differences, the number of games between bonuses, and between bonuses The winning probability of the privilege grant lottery may be changed in accordance with the number of wins (winning number) or the winning probability (winning probability), the total number of games, etc. Moreover, when a specific condition is satisfied among the big bonuses (for example, only when it is a multiple of 5), a bonus grant lottery may be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the privilege acquisition information can be individually identified by combining the model ID, the creation date and time, and the value of the R register. For example, the model ID and the value of the R register, the creation date and time, and the R register are identified. Even if only the values of are combined, although the overlapping ratio is slightly increased, it is possible to substantially identify the privilege acquisition information. Also, if the creation date and time can be specified up to year / month / day / hour / second, it is unlikely that they will be substantially the same, and even if only the creation date and model ID are combined, Each privilege acquisition information can be identified. In addition, since it is rare that the game history has the same content at the same time, the privilege acquisition information can be substantially identified by the combination of the creation date and the game history.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the two-dimensional code obtained by converting the privilege acquisition information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the player performs a two-dimensional code display end operation (betting number setting operation) or displays the two-dimensional code. The display of the two-dimensional code is terminated when the display end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the start, but the two-dimensional code obtained by converting the privilege acquisition information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. After that, the two-dimensional code obtained by converting the privilege acquisition information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 until the two-dimensional code display end operation is performed regardless of the elapsed time. Thereafter, it may be displayed uniformly until the display end time without being related to the player's operation.

  In the above embodiment, after the game is over, the main control unit 41 measures the time that has elapsed without setting the bet number, and after the game, the time that has elapsed without setting the bet amount reaches a certain time. By transmitting the standby command to the sub-control unit 91, the sub-control unit 91 executes a demonstration effect. However, based on the command from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 After the game, the time elapsed without setting the bet number may be counted, and after the game, the demonstration effect may be executed by reaching a certain time without setting the bet number. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured not to execute the demonstration effect in such a state by not transmitting the standby command in a state where the bet number is set. In the case where the time elapsed after the game ends by the unit 91, even if the time elapsed after the game ends reaches a certain time, the demonstration effect is not executed if the number of bets is set. It is also good.

  In the embodiment, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 executes a demonstration effect when the standby command is received from the main control unit 41, and displays a two-dimensional code that can specify privilege acquisition information on the liquid crystal display 51. While the standby command is received, the execution of the demonstration effect is prohibited. However, as described above, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs the game based on the command from the main control unit 41. After the end of the game, the time elapsed without setting the number of bets is counted, and the demonstration effect is executed when a certain time has elapsed from the end of the game based on the elapsed time, and the benefit acquisition information can be specified. While the code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the demonstration effect may not be executed even if a predetermined time elapses from the end of the game. Further, even if the time until the demonstration effect is executed after the game is finished is set to be longer than when the two-dimensional code is not displayed when the two-dimensional code is displayed, the player can Time to read the dimension code can be secured.

  In the above-described embodiment, the detection of the standby command and the operation of the selection switch 56 is ignored, and the corresponding program is not executed, thereby prohibiting the display of the demonstration effect and the menu screen. The operation invalidation flag of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is set. While these flags are set, the demonstration effect and the menu are displayed even when the standby command is received or the selection switch 56 or the decision switch 57 is operated. You may make it prohibit demonstration display and the display of a menu screen by aggressive control, such as preventing display of a screen.

  In the embodiment, the effect control board 90 is equipped with a CPU 91a as an effect control processor and a graphic controller 1200 as a drawing processor, and the two processors display an image on the liquid crystal display 51. Although the control is performed, the CPU 91a may have the functions of both the effect control processor and the drawing processing processor. In this case, the CPU 91a may directly access the CGROM, write the character read from the CGROM into the VRAM, and draw in the drawing area using the character on the VRAM every frame period.

  In the above-described embodiment, the VRAM SDRAM 1210 is mounted separately from the RAM 91c used as the work memory of the CPU 91a. However, a VRAM area may be assigned to a part of the storage area of the RAM 91c. In this case, the character read from the CGROM by the graphic controller 1200 may be transferred to the storage area of the RAM 91c assigned as the VRAM, and drawing may be performed in the drawing area using this character for each frame period. In addition, when the CPU 91a has the functions of both the effect control processor and the drawing processing processor, the character read from the CGROM by the CPU 91a is transferred to the storage area of the RAM 91c assigned as the VRAM, and the character is read every frame period. Drawing may be performed in the drawing area using.

  In the above embodiment, even during a period other than during the game from the operation of the start switch 7 until all reels stop, the period during which the continuous effect and the additional effect are being executed, and from the bonus winning until the bonus ends. In this period, even when the standby command is received or when the operation of the selection switch 56 or the decision switch 57 is detected, the detection of the operation of the standby command or the selection switch is ignored. However, the demonstration effect and the menu screen display are prohibited by not configuring the corresponding program, but the demonstration effect invalid flag and the operation invalid flag of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 are set during these periods. While these flags are set, when a standby command is received, the selection switch 56 or the decision switch Such as the display is also the demonstration effect and the menu screen by 7 operation is made so as not to be executed, it may be prohibited the display of the demonstration effect and the menu screen by aggressive control.

  In the above-described embodiment, the graphic controller that performs drawing using the characters transferred to the VRAM area on condition that the necessary characters are transferred to the VRAM area is used. Characters necessary for drawing are transferred, but the CPU 91a only specifies the character storage area (transfer source address) in the CGROM and the drawing position (transfer destination address) in the drawing area. The character of the transfer source address may be automatically transferred to the automatic transfer area assigned to the VRAM, and the character may be drawn at the transfer destination address of the drawing area using the character transferred to the automatic transfer area. .

  In the above embodiment, RT (2) that can expect an increase in medals is applied. However, an increase in medals may not be expected directly, and an increase in medals cannot be expected directly. Value (for example, a lottery opportunity such as a gaming state in which an increase in medals can be expected (notified gaming state (so-called AT) in which the type of a winning combination is notified) or a high probability state of the lottery opportunity) is given. It may be possible to expect an increase in medals indirectly.

  In the above-described embodiment, in a state where any bonus is carried over, RT (1) or RT (2) is not terminated even if a falling combination wins during RT (1) or RT (2). However, regardless of whether any bonus is carried over or not, if RT falls (1) or RT (2), the RT (1) or RT (2) is terminated You may make it let it.

  In the above embodiment, the winning probabilities of one piece (1) to (3) that become the transition combination of RT (1) and the fall combination of RT (2) are different, but the transition to RT (1) The winning probabilities of one (1) to (3) serving as the winning combination of RT and RT (2) may all be the same probability.

  In the above-described embodiment, there is an operation procedure for missing all of the sheets (1) to (3) serving as a transition to RT (1), but a transition to RT (1) that is not missed is provided. It may be provided. Similarly, there is an operation procedure that misses all of the replays (2) to (4) serving as a transition to RT (2), but a transition role to RT (2) that is not missed may be provided. .

  In the said Example, winning a prize of replay (2)-(4) by arrange | positioning the symbol which comprises replay (2)-(4) used as the transition role to RT (2) beyond a drawing-in range, respectively. Although the conditions are different, for example, when the replay that becomes the winning condition is determined for the replay that becomes a plurality of types of transition, and the replay that becomes any type of transition is elected, If a stop operation is made in the order of stoppage that matches the winning conditions set according to the type of replay that will be the transitional role, the winning replay will be controlled so that it will match the winning conditions. If a stop operation is performed in the order of stopping, the replay that will be the winning transition may not be awarded, and in this way, the replay that becomes the transition will be awarded with a relatively simple technical intervention Door can be. In this case, it is preferable that another replay wins at the same time as the replay that becomes the transitional role, and if the replay that becomes the transitional role is missed, the other replays that are elected simultaneously win the prize. Even if you miss a replay that becomes a transitional role, other replays can win and win medals.

  In the said Example, the stop operation of a reel is carried out at the timing outside a drawing range by arrange | positioning the symbol which comprises one piece (1)-(3) used as the transfer role to RT (1) beyond a drawing range. It is possible to avoid winning of one (1) to (3) by performing the above, but for example, avoiding winning for one (1) to (3) serving as a plurality of types of transition The order of stopping different reels is determined, and when one of the plurality of types (1) to (3) serving as a transitional combination is elected, one sheet (1) serving as the plurality of types of transitional combination When a stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels to avoid winnings determined in accordance with the types of (3), a plurality of types (1) to (3) that serve as transitional roles are taken. Control to spill and stop operation in a different order from the reel stop order to avoid winning. In such a case, one (1) to (3) serving as a plurality of types of transitions may be awarded. In this way, a plurality of types of transitions can be achieved with relatively simple technical intervention. The sheets (1) to (3) can be prevented from winning. In this case, another small combination is won at the same time as one piece (1) to (3) serving as a plurality of types of transition combinations, and one sheet (1) to (3) serving as a plurality of types of transition combinations. ) Is missed, it is preferable that other small roles that are elected at the same time win, and in this way, even if one (1) to (3), which becomes multiple types of transitional roles, is missed A character wins a prize and can win a medal.

In the embodiment, when any one of the replays (2) to (4) and one (1) to (3) is won in the initial gaming state, the type of the transitional role is notified with a probability corresponding to the notification mode. Although the transition combination type notification is performed, the transition combination type may be notified with a certain probability, or the transition combination type may be notified with a probability of 100%. Well, especially if you want to notify the type of transition role with a probability of 100%, replays (2) to (4),
When one of the cards (1) to (3) is won, the type can be surely recognized, so it is possible to win the replays (2) to (4) reliably by technical intervention. It is possible not to win 1) to (3).

  In the above-described embodiment, the transition combination and the falling combination type notification lottery for determining whether or not the transition combination type notification is performed is performed during the big bonus, but other triggers, for example, in the initial gaming state It may be performed at the start or during the initial gaming state (when a role that becomes a lottery opportunity is won or won in the initial gaming state, etc.). Can be further enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, when one of the replays (2) to (4) and 1 (1) to (3) is won in the initial game state after winning the transition combination and falling combination type notification lottery. The notification mode lottery for selecting one of the notification modes from a plurality of types of notification modes having different probabilities (notification probabilities) that the transition role type notification is executed is executed, and the notification won in the notification mode lottery Depending on the mode, the probability that the transition combination type notification will be executed when any of the replays (2) to (4) and one (1) to (3) is won in the initial game state to be changed thereafter is changed. , RT (1), RT (2), the transition probability is changed. For example, the number of times the transition role type notification is executed is selected from a plurality of different times, and replay ( 2) to (4), 1 sheet (1) When (3) is won, it is determined whether to execute the transitional role type notification or whether to grant the number of executions of the transitional role type notification during a specific period (for example, during a big bonus) When the total number of replays (2) to (4) and one (1) to (3) are won, a transition role type notification is executed, so that RT (1), RT ( The transition probability of 2) may be changed. Even in this case, the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after RT (1) starts, when any special combination wins, when a falling combination (Replay (2) to (4)) wins, or a special combination or falling combination wins. RT (1) is ended when the specified number of games is reached, but RT (1) is ended when the specified number of games is reached or the special combination wins without providing a fallen role. RT (1) when RT (1) is started and RT (1) is started and any special combination wins or any fallen combination wins May be terminated.

  In the above embodiment, when the falling combination is won at RT (1), the type is not particularly notified, but when the falling combination is won at RT (1), the type is notified with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to end the RT (1) by winning the falling combination, so that the transition to the initial gaming state and the transition to RT (2). Can increase the player's expectation.

  In the above embodiment, if any special combination wins after the start of RT (2) but before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is not terminated and any special combination wins. RT (2) is terminated when any of the falling roles wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special role or falling role. RT (2) may be terminated by reaching the specified number of games or winning a special combination without providing a falling combination in RT, or by setting RT (2) without providing the specified number of games in RT (2). ) Is started, RT (2) may be terminated when any special combination wins or when any falling combination wins.

  In the above-described embodiment, all types of operational procedures that can be operated by the player are always assigned a winning procedure for any type of falling combination, and an operation for avoiding winning of any type of falling combination. The procedure always includes a winning procedure for at least one other fallen role so that there is no avoidance procedure common to all types of fallen roles. The common avoidance procedure may not be present, and a part or all of the different types of winning combinations for the falling combination may be common.

  In the above-described embodiment, there is an operation procedure for avoiding winning for all types of falling combinations, but a forced falling combination that does not have an operating procedure for avoiding winnings may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the symbols constituting the falling combination are arranged beyond the drawing range, so that the winning of the falling combination can be avoided by stopping the reel at a timing outside the drawing range. For example, a different reel stop order for avoiding winnings is determined for a plurality of falling roles, and when one of the falling roles is elected, a winning determined according to the type of the falling role When the stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels in order to avoid the game, control is made so that the falling combination is lost, and the stop operation is performed in an order different from the stop order of the reels in order to avoid the winning In addition, the falling combination may be awarded, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the falling combination from winning by a relatively simple technical intervention. In this case, it is preferable that other small roles are elected at the same time as the fallen role, and when the fallen role is missed, the other small roles that are elected at the same time win the prize. Even if a fallen role is missed, a small role wins and a medal can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the falling reel can be avoided in the left reel, and the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the special reel can be avoided in the middle reel and the right reel. For example, for any one of the reels, by arranging the symbols so that the stop operation position outside the pulling-in role pull-in range and the stop operation position outside the special character pull-in range overlap. , Stop operation position that can avoid both the falling and special roles depending on the type of the falling role on one of the reels (outside the drawing range of the symbol that constitutes the winning falling role and constitutes the special role It may be possible to avoid both special and falling roles by performing a stop operation at such a stop operation position. In avoiding both the special combinations and fall officers only performs stop operation of any one reel.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small role is applied as the falling role of RT (2), but a special replay such as Replay (2) to Replay (4) different from Replay (1) is applied as the falling role. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), which are relatively advantageous to the player, that is, only a specific special role can be won at the same time as the falling role, A special role of a kind may be elected at the same time as a fallen role. By doing so, after the start of RT (2), one of the fallen roles is won and RT (2) ends. Even in such a case, since there is a possibility that all the special roles are won at the same time, even in such a case, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role.

  In the above-described embodiment, when any type of falling combination is elected from among a plurality of types of falling combination, the falling combination type notification that notifies the type of the falling combination with a probability corresponding to the notification mode is performed. However, the type of the falling role may be notified with a certain probability, and further, the type of the falling role may be notified with a probability of 100%. If the type is notified, the type can be surely recognized when the winning combination is won, so that it is possible to ensure that the falling combination is not won by technical intervention.

  In the above embodiment, the transition combination and the falling combination type notification lottery for determining whether or not the falling combination type notification is performed are performed during the big bonus, but other triggers such as the initial gaming state and It may be performed at the start of RT (2) or during the initial gaming state or RT (2) (when the winning role is won or won in the initial gaming state or RT (2), etc.) Well, by doing in this way, the initial gaming state and the interest during RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, when the transition combination and fallen role type notification lottery is won, a plurality of types with different probabilities (notification probabilities) that the fallen role type notification is executed when the fallen combination is won in the subsequent RT (2). The notification mode lottery for selecting one of the notification modes from the notification mode is executed, and when the fallen winning combination is won in RT (2) to be subsequently shifted by the notification mode selected in the notification mode lottery. The number of continued games of RT (2) is changed by changing the probability that the falling role type notification is executed. For example, the number of times the falling role type notification is executed is determined from a plurality of different times. Select and decide whether or not to run the falling role type notification or give the number of executions of the falling role type notification in a specific period (for example, during a big bonus) when the falling role is won for the selected number of times When the falling combination is elected for the total number of times determined to be granted, the number of games that can be expected to continue RT (2) is changed by executing the falling combination type notification. Even in this case, the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, whether to perform the transition role type notification and the falling role type notification is determined by the common transition role and falling role type notification lottery, and when one type is notified, the other notification is also performed. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute the replay type notification and the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the falling role type notification are separately performed, and it is determined whether to notify each of them independently. You may do it. The same applies to the selection of the notification mode.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to perform the type notification of the transition role to RT (1) and the type notification of the transition role to RT (2) is determined by a common lottery, and one type is notified. In this case, the other notification is also made, but the lottery of whether or not to execute the type notification of the transition role to RT (1) and the type notification of the transition role to RT (2) are notified. A lottery for determining whether or not to execute may be performed separately, and it may be determined whether to notify each of them independently. The same applies to the selection of the notification mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of special combinations having different values to be given are provided, but only a single type of special combination may be provided.

  In the embodiment, when any bonus is won, the winning pattern is determined by the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern is executed, and the winning of the bonus is notified. (2) A background selection lottery for selecting the background of the display screen in the effect is performed and the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect is changed to the background selected in the background selection lottery. 2) The same effect can be obtained as long as the effect mode in the effect is changed. For example, the lighting mode of BGM, effect sound effect, LED, lamp, etc. may be changed.

  In the previous embodiment, the production mode is changed with the probability according to the type of the special role won, but the timing of changing the production mode with the probability according to the type of the special role won (at the start of the game The first stop, the second stop, the third stop, the winning combination, etc. may be selected. Even in this case, the timing at which the effect mode of the RT (2) effect changes. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the type of the special role that is won, and it is possible to more effectively enhance the interest associated with the RT (2) production.

  In the above embodiment, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game, the number of bets before the certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends when the credit settlement operation is performed. Is set, and even if a certain amount of time has elapsed since the game ended, when the betting amount is settled and a standby command is transmitted, the normal volume (MAX) is set without waiting for the certain amount of time to elapse. For example, in the case of playing a game using a game ball as described later, a control for lowering the game sound effect being output is performed. The operation of returning the game ball from the upper plate where the game ball supplied to the take-in device waits to the lower plate from which the game ball returned from the take-in device, etc. is discharged, inside the take-in device The remaining game balls in the lower plate When an operation to be rejected is made, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has not elapsed since the game ended, the game sound effect that is being output at normal volume (MAX) without waiting for the certain time to elapse Control (silence control) may be performed, and even in such a configuration, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the previous game ended, the player Since the volume of the continuous game sound effect can be reduced by the intention of the player, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the method of restricting connector removal by attaching the connector restricting members 500a and 500b to the board case 200 is the same as the cable 600a and the game control board 40 that connect the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110. Is applied to the connector connection between the cable 600d for connecting the production relay board 80 and the game control board 40, but may be applied to other connector connections.

  In the above embodiment, a method for restricting the release of the connection between the connectors is described. For example, an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game, such as the inserted medal sensor 31 and the start switch 7, It is preferable to attach a covering member that is inaccessible from the outside to the connection part between the electronic component and the cable, and in this way, an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game It is possible to prevent an unauthorized device such as a driving device from being attached to the connection portion with the cable. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which a trace remains (such as a structure that cannot be removed unless a part of the covering member is destroyed) when the covering member that covers the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable is removed. By doing so, it becomes possible to leave a trace on which the illegal device is attached, and it is possible to grasp the possibility that there was an illegal act after the fact.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are configured separately from the board case 200, and the board case 200 is removed from the mounting base 250, whereby the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are removed from the board case 200 and the connector is removed. For example, when the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are once attached to the board case 200, a part of the board case 200 or the connector restriction members 500a and 500b must be destroyed. For example, the connector restriction members 500a and 500b may be removed from the board case 200 so that the restriction on connector removal cannot be released.

  In the embodiment, the connector regulating members 500a and 500b are constituted by the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520, and after attaching the attachment side member 510 to the board case 200, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector. In this state, by attaching the connector cover 520 to the attachment side member 510, the removal of the connector is restricted, but it is integrated from the beginning with the cable side connector connected to the board side connector. The connector restriction members 500a and 500b may be attached to the board case 200 to restrict the connector from being removed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the connector restricting members 500a and 500b are used as the method for restricting the release of the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case has been described. May be.

  A modification of the method for restricting the removal of the cable-side connector from the board-side connector will be described below.

  [Modification 1]

  FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 700 and the connector cover 710 in the first modification.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the board case 700 in Modification 1 is composed of a lower case 700a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 700b that covers the upper part of the lower case 700a. Each of the lower case 700a and the upper case 700b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) as in the case of the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 700b, an insertion hole 701 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pieces 702 and 702 each having a locking hole 703 are erected in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole 701 of the upper case 700b.

  The connector cover 710 is formed in a box shape in which the lower surface and the rear surface in the drawing are opened, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 with the openings on the lower surface and the rear surface.

  The front surface of the connector cover 710 in the figure relates to positions corresponding to the locking holes 703 and 703 formed in the locking pieces 702 and 702 when the board-side connector 620a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 are covered. Stop holes 711 and 711 are formed, and concave grooves 712 and 712 larger in diameter than the locking holes 711 and 711 are formed in the periphery thereof.

  Thin portions 715 are formed by forming notches 713 and long holes 714 at positions from the center of the locking holes 711 and 711 on the front surface and the upper surface of the connector cover 710 in the drawing.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for releasing the same will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 52, with the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, the connector cover 710 covers the cable side connector 610a and the locking pieces 702, 702 connected to the board side connector 620a. . As a result, the locking holes 711 and 711 of the connector cover 710 and the locking holes 703 and 703 of the locking piece 702 are in communication with each other, and the locking pins 720 are attached to the communicating locking holes 711 and 703. To do.

  The locking pin 720 is a member in which a locking claw 721 whose tip is elastically deformable inward is formed on the head having substantially the same diameter as the concave groove 712. As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. By inserting the locking claw 721 side of the locking pin 720 into the locking hole 711 and the locking hole 703, the locking claw 721 is elastically deformed inward, and the head of the locking pin 720 is formed in the concave groove 712. By inserting until it is filled, the elastic deformation of the locking claw 721 is released, the locking claw 721 engages with the locking piece 702, and the locking pin 720 cannot be removed from the connector cover 710 and the locking piece 702. Accordingly, the connector cover 710 is fixed so as not to be removable from the upper case 700b via the locking piece 702.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the cable-side connector 610a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 connected to the board-side connector 620a are covered by the connector cover 710, and the locking pins 720 are attached to the locking holes 711 and 703. As a result, the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 710 and the surface of the upper case 700b, and movement of the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted. Therefore, the removal of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, since the connector cover 710 is fixed so as not to be detached from the upper case 700b via the locking piece 702 by mounting the locking pin 720, the locking piece 702 of the connector cover 710 or the upper case 700b must be destroyed. The connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a cannot be released.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 53, the thin portion 715 formed in the connector cover 710 is cut with a tool such as a nipper N, so that the connector cover 710 is connected to the board-side connector 620a as shown in FIG. The covered portion of the cable-side connector 610a is separated from the portions 710 ′ and 710 ′ connected to the locking pieces 702 and 702, and the covering is released to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. It becomes possible. Even in this case, since the portions 710 ′ and 710 ′ of the connector cover 710 connected to the locking pieces 702 and 702 remain fixed to the upper case 700b, the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is left. You can leave a trace that has been released.

  In the method of the first modification, the locking pieces 702 and 702 are erected on the upper case 700b. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the attachment pieces are attached to the board case and formed on the attachment side member. A locking member is provided upright near both sides of the insertion hole through which the board-side connector 620a is inserted, and the connector cover 710 is fixed to the locking piece of the attachment-side member to constitute a connector restricting member. In this way, even when the board is exchanged together with the board case, the board case can be opened without breaking the board case and opening it, or breaking the mounting side member or the connector cover 710 and separating them. The connection between the connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a can be released.

  [Modification 2]

  FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 730 and the connector cover 740 in the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the board case 730 according to the second modification includes a lower case 730a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 730b that covers the upper part of the lower case 730a. Each of the lower case 730a and the upper case 730b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) as in the case of the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 730b, an insertion hole 731 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a location corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pins 735 and 735 are formed in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole 731 of the upper case 730b, and locking pins 735 and 735 each having locking claws 736 and 736 whose tips are elastically deformable inward.

  Further, the connector cover 740 is formed so that the lower surface and the rear surface in the figure are opened, can cover the board-side connector 620a, and has a length longer than the separation width of the locking pins 735 and 735. . Further, attachment surfaces 746 and 746 are formed on part of the lower surface of both ends of the connector cover 740. When the board-side connector 620a is covered on the attachment surfaces 746 and 746, the locking pins 735 and 735 are formed. Slots 747 and 747 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to. Each of the long holes 747 has a long diameter in a direction perpendicular to the locking claws 736 and 736 of the locking pin 735, and the width of the short diameter portion of the long hole 747 is the same as that of the locking claws 736 and 736. It is formed narrower than the distance between the tips.

  Thin portions 745 are formed by forming a notch 743 and a long hole 744 at positions from the center of the long holes 747 and 747 on the front and top surfaces of the connector cover 740 in the drawing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for releasing the same in the second modification will be described.

  As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 55, with the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a, the locking pins 735 and 735 of the upper case 730b are connected to both mounting surfaces 746 and 746 of the connector cover 740. The formed long holes 747 and 747 are inserted. When the locking pins 735 and 735 are inserted into the long holes 747 and 747, the locking claws 736 and 736 are elastically deformed inward, until the mounting surface 746 of the connector cover 740 and the upper surface of the upper case 730b come into contact with each other. By inserting the locking pins 735 and 735, the elastic deformation of the locking claws 736 and 736 is released, the locking claws 736 and 736 engage with the mounting surface 746, and the locking pins 735 and 735 are connected to the connector cover. The connector cover 740 is fixed to the upper case 730b through the locking pins 735 and 735 so as not to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the connector cover 740 covers the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, and the locking pins 735 and 735 are attached to the long holes 747, whereby the connector cover 740 and the upper case 730b are attached. The cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the surface of the cable, and movement of the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted, so that the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted. Withdrawal will be regulated. Further, the connector cover 740 is fixed so that the connector cover 740 cannot be removed from the upper case 730b via the locking pins 735 and 735 when the locking pins 735 and 735 are locked to the long holes 747 and 747. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a cannot be released unless the locking pins 735 and 735 of the connector cover 740 or the upper case 730b are broken.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56, the thin portion 745 formed in the connector cover 740 is cut with a tool such as a nipper N, so that it is connected to the board-side connector 620a in the connector cover 740 as shown in FIG. The covered portion of the cable-side connector 610a is separated from the portions 740 ′ and 740 ′ connected to the locking pins 735 and 735, and the covering is released to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. It becomes possible.

  58. As shown in FIG. 58, the removal of the portion 740 ′ with the connector cover 740 connected is performed in such a manner that the connector cover 740 with the connector cover 740 connected is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the long hole 747 (the vertical direction in FIG. 58). Rotate 'in the black arrow direction a in the figure. As a result, the engagement of the portion 740 ′ where the locking pin 735 and the connector cover 740 are connected is released. Then, the portions 740 ′ and 740 ′ with the connector cover 740 connected can be removed from the upper case 730 b by pulling out the portions 740 ′ with the connector cover 740 connected in the black arrow direction b in the figure. Even in this case, the connector cover 740 is destroyed and cannot be returned to the original state, so that a trace remains that the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is released.

  In the method of the modification 2, the locking pins 735 and 735 are erected on the upper case 730b. However, as in the above embodiment, the locking pins 735 and 735 are provided on the mounting side member and formed on the mounting side member. The locking pins 735 and 735 are erected in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole for allowing the board-side connector 620a to pass therethrough, and the connector cover 740 is fixed to the locking pins 735 and 735 of the mounting side member. A restricting member may be configured. In this way, even when the board is replaced with the board case, the board case is broken and opened, or the attachment side member or the connector cover 740 is broken and separated. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released without being released.

  [Modification 3]

  FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 750 and the connector cover 760 in the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the board case 750 according to the third modification includes a lower case 750a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 750b that covers the upper part of the lower case 750a. Each of the lower case 750a and the upper case 750b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 750b, an insertion hole 751 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a location corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. In addition, attachment holes 754 and 754 are formed on the side surface of the upper case 750b located behind the insertion hole 751. A locking piece 752 having a locking hole 753 is provided in the vicinity of the insertion hole 751 of the upper case 750b in the lower case 750a.

  The connector cover 760 is formed so as to open from the lower surface to the rear surface in the drawing, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a. On the rear surface of the connector cover 760 in the figure, when the board-side connector 620a is covered, mounting pieces 764 and 764 having locking claws at the tips project from the rear at positions corresponding to the mounting holes 754 and 754. Has been. Further, on the front surface of the connector cover 760 in the figure, a locking piece 762 having a locking hole 763 is formed at a position corresponding to the locking piece 752 when the board-side connector 620a is covered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a method for restricting the removal of the cable-side connector from the board-side connector and a method for releasing the same in the third modification will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with a connector cover 760 in a state where the cable-side connector 610a is connected to the board-side connector 620a. When the corresponding mounting pieces 764 and 764 of the connector cover 760 are inserted into the mounting holes 754 and 754 of the upper case 750b, the locking claws of the mounting pieces 764 and 764 engage with the mounting holes 754 and 754, and the connector cover 760 is The upper case 750b cannot be removed. When the connector cover 760 is attached to the upper case 750b in this way, the engagement holes 763 of the engagement pieces 762 of the connector cover 760 and the engagement holes 753 of the engagement pieces 752 of the lower case 750a are in communication with each other. The binding band 769 is attached to the locking hole 763 and the locking hole 753.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the binding band 769 is formed with a label portion 768 to which an ID number or the like that allows ID management is assigned, an engagement portion 766 having an engagement hole 766a, and a part thereof at predetermined pitches. And a band portion 767 having a locking projection 767a. The engagement hole 766a is engaged with the locking projection 767a when the band portion 767 is inserted into the engagement hole 766a. An engagement claw (not shown) is formed to be stopped. Thus, once the band portion 767 is inserted into the engagement hole 766a, the removal of the band portion 767 in the opposite direction to the direction of insertion through the engagement hole 766a is restricted.

  When the band portion 767 of the binding band 769 is inserted through the engagement hole 766a, the band portion 767 is disengaged from the engagement hole 766a due to the engagement between the locking protrusion 767a of the band portion 767 and the engagement claw of the engagement hole 766a. Since the removal is restricted, the locking piece 762 and the locking piece 752 are fixed. Then, the engagement between the attachment pieces 764 and 764 and the attachment holes 754 and 754 and the connection with the engagement pieces 762 and the engagement pieces 752 by the binding band 769 restrict the movement of the connector cover 760 in the vertical and horizontal directions. Is attached to the substrate case in a non-removable manner with respect to 750.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, when the connector cover 760 is attached to the board case 750, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered by the connector cover 760, and the cable to the board side connector 620a is covered. Since the movement of the side connector 610a in the pulling direction is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, the mounting pieces 764 and 764 engage with the mounting holes 754 and 754, and the locking pieces 762 and the locking pieces 752 are fixed so as not to be detached by the binding band 769. Therefore, the substrate is not cut unless the binding band 769 is cut. The connection between the side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a cannot be released.

  For releasing the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a, for example, by cutting the binding band 769 with a tool such as a nipper, the fixing of the locking piece 762 and the locking piece 752 is released, and the connector Since the cover 760 can be opened upward and the cable-side connector 610a can be moved in the pulling direction, the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released. Even if the binding band 769 is cut and replaced with a new binding band, the ID number or the like is given to the label portion 768 of the binding band 769, so that the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is established. The released trace can be left.

  In the method of the third modification, the locking piece 752 protrudes from the lower case 730a. However, the mounting piece is provided with an attachment side member attached to the board case as in the above embodiment, and the attachment side member has an attachment hole and an engagement member. The connector restricting member may be configured by providing a locking piece having a stop hole and fixing the connector cover 760 to the locking piece of the attachment side member. Even when the entire board case is replaced, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be disconnected without breaking and opening the board case or forming the binding band 769.

  [Modification 4]

  FIG. 61 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 770 and the connector cover 780 in the fourth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the board case 770 in the modification 4 is composed of a lower case 770a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 770b that covers the upper part of the lower case 770a. Each of the lower case 770a and the upper case 770b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) similarly to the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 770b, an insertion hole 771 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pieces 772 and 772 formed with locking holes 773 and 773 project from the front surface of the lower case 770a in the vicinity of the insertion hole 771.

  The connector cover 780 is formed so that a lower surface and a rear surface in the drawing are opened, and has a length capable of covering the board-side connector 620a.

  Locking pieces 782 and 782 project from the front surface of the connector cover 780 in the figure at positions corresponding to the locking pieces 772 and 772 when the board-side connector 620a is covered. The locking pieces 782 and 782 are formed with locking holes 783 and 783 at positions corresponding to the locking holes 773 and 773 formed in the locking pieces 772 and 772. A step portion capable of accommodating a screw head is formed on the upper portion of the locking hole 783.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for releasing the same will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 780 in a state where the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a. Then, in a state where the locking holes 783 and 783 of the locking pieces 782 and 782 of the connector cover 780 are in communication with the locking holes 773 and 773 of the locking pieces 772 and 772, any one of these communicating locking holes 783. And, as shown in FIG. 63, the one-way screw P is screwed into the corresponding locking holes 773 and 773 until the head is accommodated in the stepped portion.

  As a result, the locking piece 782 of the connector cover 780 and the locking piece 772 of the lower case 770a are fixed, and the connector cover 780 is fixed to the board case 770 so as not to be detached. In this state, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 780 and the surface of the upper case 770b, and movement of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Therefore, the removal of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, since the connector cover 780 is fixed so as not to be detached from the board case 770 by screwing the one-way screw P, the board-side connector 620a and the cable side are not damaged unless the locking piece 772 of the connector cover 780 or the lower case 770a is broken. The connection with the connector 610a cannot be released.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the connector cover 780 is formed by breaking the locking piece 782 fixed to the locking piece 772 of the locking pieces 782 and 782 formed on the connector cover 780 with a tool such as a nipper N. 780 can be removed from the board case 770, and by removing the connector cover 780 from the board case 770, the cable side connector 610a can be moved in the pulling direction, and the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a can be performed. It becomes possible to cancel. Even in this case, the locking piece 782 broken from the main body of the connector cover 780 remains in a state of being fixed to the locking piece 772, so that the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is removed. Can leave.

  The connector cover 780 is formed with a plurality of locking pieces 782 and a plurality of locking pieces 772 corresponding to the lower case 770a, and any one of the plurality of locking pieces 782 is formed. Since the connector cover 780 is fixed to the board case 770 in a non-removable manner only by fixing the locking piece 772 corresponding to one, and the release of the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is restricted. Even if the locking piece 782 is broken, the connector cover 780 is removed, and the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is released, if the unused locking piece 782 remains, the unused engagement By fixing the stopper piece 782 and the corresponding locking piece 772, the removed connector cover 780 cannot be removed again from the board case 770. Fixed, it is possible to regulate the release of the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. That is, while the unused locking piece 782 remains, the connector cover 780 can be used repeatedly and can be reused while leaving the removed trace.

  In the method of the modified example 4, the locking pieces 772 and 772 protrude from the lower case 770a. However, the mounting piece is attached to the board case as in the above embodiment, and is locked to the mounting side member. By providing a locking piece having a hole and fixing the locking piece of the attachment side member and the locking piece 782 of the connector cover 780, the connector restricting member may be configured. Even when the board is replaced with the board case, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a are disconnected without breaking and opening the board case or breaking the mounting-side member or the connector cover 780 and separating them. can do.

  In the above embodiment, the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200 are sealed and the substrate case 200 is fixed to the mounting base 250 using a one-way screw. You may perform using other members, such as using a locking pin.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device for paying out a game ball, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except for the configuration related to RT, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, one (1) to (3) is applied as the falling combination, but in this embodiment, cherry is applied as the falling combination. That is, after starting RT (2), the CPU 41a reaches the specified game number without winning any bonus or cherry, or wins any bonus before reaching the specified game number. RT (2) is ended by winning. If any bonus is won during RT (2), RT (2) will end even if Cherry wins until the specified number of games is reached or until the winning bonus is won. There is nothing to do.

  Since there is no stop operation position that does not stop any of the “red 7” symbol, “white 7” symbol, or “black BAR” symbol that constitutes one (1) to (3) on the winning line, it is intentional The “Red 7”, “White 7” and “Black BAR” symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, and one (1) to (3) is intentionally dropped. On the other hand, for “Cherry”, there is a stop operation position (timing of area numbers 7 to 12 and 20) that does not stop on the winning line for the left reel. When you win a cherry, you can intentionally miss it.

  For this reason, even if a cherry is won during RT (2), the player can continue RT (2) until he reaches the specified number of games if he does not win a special role by continuing to miss it. It has become.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, after RT (2) starts, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is terminated. RT (2) is ended when any special role wins, when Cherry, who is a fallen role, wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special role or fallen role. After the start of RT (2), even if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, if the selected special role does not win, RT (2 ) Will not end and if the selected special role is not awarded, it will be possible to continue control to RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if you win the prize, Kere words, it is possible to digest the RT (2) until it reaches the specified number of games, never would cause losses feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  In addition, even after the start of RT (2), even if a falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at an operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the falling combination, that is, at a timing outside the cherry pull-in range of the left reel, and Since the stop operation is performed so that the special roles are not arranged, that is, the RT can be continued by the technical intervention of the player, the interest associated with the RT (2) can be enhanced. At this time, since the procedure for avoiding the falling combination is always constant, if the player's skill is high, the falling combination can be surely avoided and RT (2) can be continued until the prescribed number of games is reached.

  In addition, Cherry, who is a fallen role, is a role that can be won at the same time as a special role during RT (2). Therefore, even if the fallen role is won after RT (2) starts, Since there is a possibility of winning, even in such a case, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the special role. Furthermore, in this embodiment, only the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), which are relatively advantageous to the player, may be won at the same time as the falling combination, so that the falling combination is won. However, since there is a possibility that the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are won at the same time, even in such a case, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, even if Cherry wins during RT (2), if any special role is elected, RT (2) will not end, and Cherry will win during RT (2). Even if you do so, RT (2) will continue to ensure that the special role is won, so you can enhance your interest even if you win the cherry.

  Also, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of special roles (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus), and the number of medals that can be expected by winning each is different. When a winning combination is won, the advantage of the value given varies depending on the type of the winning combination.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the big bonus is won, the number of medals that can be expected during the big bonus is significantly larger than the regular bonus associated with the regular bonus being won, and the end of the big bonus After that, there is a possibility that the transition combination type notification and the falling combination type notification may be executed, so that further medal acquisition can be expected.

  The big bonus includes a big bonus (1) and a big bonus (2). The big bonus (1) has a larger number of medals that can be expected during the big bonus than the big bonus (2). Since the ratio of the notification mode having a higher notification probability is selected for the big bonus (1) is higher, the big bonus (1) can be expected to acquire more medals than the big bonus (2). ing.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, depending on the type of special combination, not only the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, but also the probability that the transition combination type is notified in the initial initial gaming state, falls at RT (2). Since the probability that the combination type notification is made, that is, the number of medals that can be expected thereafter, also varies, it is possible to give a sharp increase / decrease in medals according to the type of special combination.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the structure of the periphery of disconnection monitoring IC in a game control board. It is a figure which shows a winning combination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the characteristic according to alerting | reporting mode. It is a figure which shows the characteristic according to BB production mode. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the continuous effect selection table for selecting the pattern of a continuous effect and an additional effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a demonstration production | presentation and the display of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the preparation procedure of privilege acquisition information. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between volume adjustment and the progress of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between volume adjustment and the progress of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a demonstration production | presentation, log | history browsing, and the progress of a game. It is a figure which shows the structure of the display control circuit mounted in the sub-control part. It is a figure which shows the structure of a VRAM area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of the state by which the character required for a VRAM area | region is arrange | positioned when drawing with respect to a drawing area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition of drawing of the character etc. to a drawing area. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a demonstration production | presentation, log | history browsing, and a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a main control part performs in a winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (main) performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the display control confirmation process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (sub) performed when CPU of a sub-control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the substrate case to the attachment base. It is the principal part expansion perspective view of the attachment side member and connector cover which comprise a connector control member. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 44, (b) (c) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the board | substrate case to the attachment base, and also attached the connector cover with respect to the attachment side member. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 46, (b) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the mounting base and cover member which comprise a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the cover member with respect to the mounting base. (A) is EE sectional drawing of FIG. 49, (b) is FF sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 1, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 2, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 3, and a connector cover. (A) (b) is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 3. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 4, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. A circuit showing a modification of the configuration around the power source of the main control unit in the game control board.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 40 Game control board 41 Main control part 51 Liquid crystal display 90 Production control board 91 Sub-control part 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM
92 Display control circuit 200 Substrate case 250 Mounting base 500a, 500b Connector regulating member 510 Mounting side member 520 Connector cover 1200 Graphic controller

Claims (7)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A gaming system having a slot machine that is terminated and displayed so that a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device, and a management device that grants a privilege,
The slot machine is
An image display device capable of displaying an image;
A date output means for outputting date information,
A history storage means for storing a game history based on the game results,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant the privilege by lottery;
Information display determination means for determining whether or not to display information for obtaining the privilege , on the condition that the privilege grant determination means determines to grant the privilege;
Code information generating means for generating code information obtained by encoding the information when the information display determining means determines to display the information;
Code information display means for displaying the code information generated by the code information generation means on the image display device in a form readable from the outside;
With
The code information generating means randomly identifies the date and time information acquired from the date and time output means, the game history information stored in the history storage means, and whether or not the privilege has been obtained as the information. Generate code information that can be specified to identify the changing random number information ,
The management device
A specifying means for specifying the date and time information, the game history information, and the random number information from the code information;
Random number information storage means for storing the random number information specified from the code information to which the privilege has been granted;
Determining means for determining whether or not the random number information specified by the specifying means is stored in the random number information storage means;
The date and time information specified by the specifying means and the game history on the condition that the determining means determines that the random number information specified by the specifying means is not stored in the random number information storage means. A granting means for granting a privilege based on the information;
Gaming system comprising: a. 2. The code information generation unit generates code information encoded so as to be able to specify information obtained by encrypting at least the date / time information and the information specifying the game history among the information. Gaming system . The slot machine is
A demonstration effect executing means for executing a demonstration effect on the image display device when a state in which the game is not progressing after the game is continued for a predetermined period;
In the case where the code information is displayed by the code information display means, the demonstration effect is executed during the period in which the code information is displayed even if the game is not progressing after the game ends for a predetermined period. Prohibition of demonstration effects when displaying prohibited code information,
The game system according to claim 1, further comprising:   The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. One game is completed by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device, an image display device capable of displaying an image, a date and time output means for outputting date and time information, On condition that the history storage means for storing the game history based on the result of the game, the privilege grant determining means for determining whether to grant a privilege by lottery, and the privilege grant determining means are determined to grant the privilege. The information display determination means for determining whether or not to display information for obtaining the privilege, and the information display determination means, when the information display determination means determines to display the information, the information is encoded. Code information generating means for generating code information; and code information display means for displaying the code information generated by the code information generating means on the image display device in a form that can be read from the outside. As the information, the generation means acquires the date and time information acquired from the date and time output means, the game history information stored in the history storage means, and a randomly changing random number for identifying whether or not the privilege has been obtained. A management device that grants the privilege based on the code information displayed in the slot machine that generates code information that is coded in such a way that information can be specified,
  A specifying means for specifying the date and time information, the game history information, and the random number information from the code information;
  Random number information storage means for storing the random number information specified from the code information to which the privilege has been granted;
  Determining means for determining whether or not the random number information specified by the specifying means is stored in the random number information storage means;
  The date and time information specified by the specifying means and the game history on the condition that the determining means determines that the random number information specified by the specifying means is not stored in the random number information storage means. A granting means for granting a privilege based on the information;
  With
  A management device characterized by that. The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device
An image display device capable of displaying an image;
A date output means for outputting date information,
A history storage means for storing a game history based on the game results,
Privilege grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant the privilege by a management device that grants the privilege, by lottery;
Information display determination means for determining whether or not to display information for obtaining the privilege , on the condition that the privilege grant determination means determines to grant the privilege;
Code information generating means for generating code information obtained by encoding the information when the information display determining means determines to display the information;
Code information display means for displaying the code information generated by the code information generation means on the image display device in a form readable from the outside;
With
The code information generating means obtains, as the information, the date and time information acquired from the date and time output means, game history information for specifying a game history stored in the history storage means, and the privilege from the management device. A slot machine, characterized by generating randomly- coded random number information for identifying whether or not , and code information encoded so as to be identifiable. The code information generation means, according to claim 5, characterized in that to produce at least the date and time information and the code information identifiable code the encrypted information information identifying the game history of the information Slot machine. A demonstration effect executing means for executing a demonstration effect on the image display device when a state in which the game is not progressing after the game is continued for a predetermined period;
In the case where the code information is displayed by the code information display means, the demonstration effect is executed during the period in which the code information is displayed even if the game is not progressing after the game ends for a predetermined period. Prohibition of demonstration effects when displaying prohibited code information,
The slot machine according to claim 5, comprising:

Images